2022 Ram Promaster City: Owner'S Manual

2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to
take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY

©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. First Edition
OW N E R ’S M AN UA L
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_VM_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 6 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 39 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................52 4
5 MULTIMEDIA .................................................................................................................................78 5
6 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 131 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...................................................................................................... 171 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 189 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 236
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................242
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................246
11
INTRODUCTION UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................21 CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 28

Introducing Voice Recognition.........................21 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................7
Basic Voice Commands ...................................21 Functions ..........................................................28
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................7 Get Started .......................................................21 Operating Tips ..................................................30
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............7 Additional Information .....................................21 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 31
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................8 MIRRORS ...............................................................22 Storage .............................................................31
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................22 USB Control — If Equipped ..............................32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vanity Mirror .....................................................22 Power Outlets ..................................................32
KEYS ....................................................................... 10 Outside Mirrors ................................................22 WINDOWS ............................................................. 34
Key Fob .............................................................10 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................24 Power Window Controls —If Equipped ...........34
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 12 Multifunction Lever ..........................................24 Window Bar Grates — If Equipped ..................35
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 12 Headlights ........................................................24 Wind Buffeting .................................................35
DOORS ................................................................... 13 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — HOOD....................................................................... 36
Power Door Locks ............................................13 If Equipped .......................................................24 Opening.............................................................36
Auto Unlock Doors............................................13 High/Low Beam Switch....................................24 Closing ..............................................................36
Sliding Side Door ..............................................13 Flash-To-Pass ..................................................24 CARGO AREA FEATURES...................................... 37
Double Rear Swing Doors................................15 Parking Lights ..................................................24 Rear Cargo Tie-Downs .....................................37
Child-Protection Door Lock System.................15 Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ..................24 ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED................................. 37
STEERING WHEEL.................................................. 16 Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................25
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...................16 Turn Signals......................................................25 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
SEATS ...................................................................... 16 Lane Change Assist..........................................25 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ...................16 INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................25
Courtesy/Interior Lights...................................25 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 39
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped .....................17
WIPERS AND WASHERS ......................................26 Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................40
Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................18
Front Wiper Operation......................................27 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................... 40
Head Restraints ...............................................19
Rear Wiper And Washer —If Equipped............28 Location And Controls......................................40
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ...................41
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items.........42
TRIP COMPUTER.................................................... 43 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...............................55 VEHICLE LOADING ................................................. 67

Trip Button ........................................................43 Key Ignition Park Interlock...............................56 Vehicle Certification Label...............................67
Trip Functions ..................................................43 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .............67
Values Displayed ..............................................44 System .............................................................56 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..................67
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 44 9-Speed Automatic Transmission ..................56 Tire Size ............................................................67
Red Warning Lights ..........................................44 POWER STEERING ................................................60 Rim Size ............................................................67
Yellow Warning Lights ......................................47 Power Steering Fluid Check ............................60 Inflation Pressure.............................................67
Green Indicator Lights......................................49 CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .......................60 Curb Weight......................................................67
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................50 To Activate ........................................................61 Overloading ......................................................68
White Indicator Lights ......................................50 To Set A Desired Speed ...................................61 Loading ............................................................68
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 50 To Vary The Speed Setting...............................61 TRAILER TOWING .................................................. 68
Onboard Diagnostic System To Accelerate For Passing ...............................61 Common Towing Definitions............................68
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................51 To Resume Speed............................................62 Trailer Hitch Classification...............................70
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE To Deactivate ...................................................62 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
PROGRAMS ............................................................ 51 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — Weight Ratings) ...............................................71
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................62 Trailer And Tongue Weight .............................71
STARTING AND OPERATING ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .............62 Towing Requirements .....................................71
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts .................63 Towing Tips ......................................................74
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................ 52
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure RECREATIONAL TOWING
Automatic Transmission ..................................52
Indications ........................................................64 (BEHIND MOTORHOME) ....................................... 75
Normal Starting ................................................52
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle....75
Cold Weather Operation .................................52
System ..............................................................64 Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission .. 76
Extended Park Starting ....................................52
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage DRIVING TIPS ......................................................... 76
If Engine Fails To Start .....................................53
After Starting.....................................................53 Precautions.......................................................64 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..........................76
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED............ 53 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................65 Driving Through Water ....................................76
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......... 54 REFUELING THE VEHICLE .....................................66
PARKING BRAKE .................................................. 54
MULTIMEDIA SAFETY Jacking Instructions ...................................... 174

Vehicles With Alloy Wheels........................... 177
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................... 78 SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 131
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers ........ 178
CYBERSECURITY ................................................... 78 Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).. 131
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ....................179
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 79 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 132
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 179
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings.............................79 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 135
Tire Service Kit Usage................................... 179
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.................................. 88 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 135
JUMP STARTING ..................................................181
Identifying Your Radio ......................................88 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 137
Preparations For Jump Starting ................... 181
Safety And General Information ......................90 Occupant Restraint Systems ........................ 137
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 182
UCONNECT MODES ............................................... 91 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 137
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................183
Radio Mode ......................................................91 Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 138
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .................184
Media Mode......................................................98 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 144
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............................184
Phone Mode ................................................. 100 Child Restraints............................................. 152
SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 168 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................185
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED..................110
Transporting Passengers.............................. 168 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................187
Operating Navigation Mode —If Equipped ... 110
Transporting Pets ......................................... 168 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside (EARS) ..................................................................188
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................128
The Vehicle ................................................... 168 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................188
Radio Operation ............................................ 128
Media Mode................................................... 129 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED ......................129 Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 169 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ram Telematics General Information.......... 129 Exhaust Gas................................................... 170 SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................189
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....130 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 170 Maintenance Plan......................................... 190
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 130 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................193
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Engine Compartment — 2.4L ....................... 193
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 171 Checking Oil Level ........................................ 194
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ......................... 171 Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 194
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 171 Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 194
Jack Location — If Equipped ......................... 172 Pressure Washing ......................................... 195
Removing The Spare Tire —If Equipped....... 172
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................195 BODYWORK ......................................................... 233 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Engine Oil....................................................... 195 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 233
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 196 Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 234
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................242
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 196 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 234
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 242
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 196 INTERIORS .......................................................... 235
Prepare A List ................................................ 242
Body Lubrication............................................ 197 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 235
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 242
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 197 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 235
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................242
Exhaust System ............................................ 198 Leather Surfaces........................................... 235
Cooling System ............................................. 199 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 242
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 235
Brake System ............................................... 202 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 242
Automatic Transmission .............................. 203 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Mexico............................................................ 243
Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped ............... 204 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 243
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 236 Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Fuses.............................................................. 207
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 236 Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).................... 243
Bulb Replacement......................................... 213
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.. 236 Service Contract ........................................... 243
TIRES .....................................................................217
Torque Specifications ................................... 236 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................244
Tire Safety Information ................................ 217
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 237 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................244
Tires — General Information ........................ 225
2.4L Engine ................................................... 237 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................244
Tire Types....................................................... 228
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 238 In The 50 United States And
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 229
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 238 Washington, D.C............................................ 244
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 231
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......... 238 In Canada ...................................................... 244
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ................ 232
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 238 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................245
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 232
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 238 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................245
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 239
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................232
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 239
Treadwear ...................................................... 232
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................. 240
Traction Grades ............................................. 233
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 240
Temperature Grades ..................................... 233
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 241
STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................233
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has
been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented
by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time.
Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your
vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in
the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data
contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles
produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information,
contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements are against operating The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body 1
injury and/or death. builders. U.S. residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
These statements are against procedures that
CAUTION! Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-ray™,
could result in damage to your vehicle.
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
A suggestion which will improve installation, items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
result in damage.
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier instructions are missing, please contact an authorized dealer for assistance in
TIP:
use of the product or functionality. obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.
PAGE REFERENCE For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
ARROW www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical
Follow this reference for additional information on
specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's
a particular feature.
technical support. For service issues, contact an authorized dealer.
FOOTNOTE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

Supplementary and relevant information WARNING!
pertaining to the topic.
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of Ú page 46
each symbol Ú page 44.
NOTE: Oil Pressure Warning Light
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and Ú page 46
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Ú page 46
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 44 Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 46
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 45 Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 47
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 45 Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Ú page 47
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 45
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Ú page 46
Yellow Warning Lights Green Indicator Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights 1
Ú page 47 Ú page 49
Low Fuel Warning Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Generic Warning Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Cruise Control Indicator Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light

Ú page 48 Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 50
Ú page 48
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light White Indicator Lights

Ú page 49
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Ú page 50
Ú page 49
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS To Lock/Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button to unlock all
KEY F OB doors (on passenger vehicles and U.S. cargo
vehicles) or unlock the front two doors (Canada
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system which
cargo vehicles). To lock the doors, push and
supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). The key fob
release the lock button once. The doors can also
allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
be locked and unlocked manually by using the
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
mechanical key.
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
an integrated mechanical key, which can be flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals
accessed by pushing the mechanical key release will flash and the horn will chirp (if activated
button. through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 79). If a
door is open when the lock button is pushed, the
NOTE:
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key turn signal lights will flash at an increased rate to
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
indicate that a door is still open.
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone,
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
laptop or other electronic device; these devices Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
may block the key fob’s wireless signal 2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
The recommended replacement battery is
Ú page 245. 3 — Lock Button
CR2032.
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
NOTE: 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and NOTE:

 Customers are recommended to use a battery replace the battery observing its polarity.  Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin 4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
battery dimensions may not meet the original turn the screw to lock it into place. another vehicle.
OEM coin battery dimensions.  Only key fobs that are programmed to the
 Perchlorate Material – special handling may WARNING! vehicle electronics can be used to start and 2
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
ouswaste/perchlorate.
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a programmed to any other vehicle.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
release the mechanical key to access the swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns WARNING!
battery case screw located on the side of the in just two hours and can lead to death.
key fob.  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
 If you think a battery may have been swal- and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, unattended.
fob using a small screwdriver.
seek immediate medical attention.
 Always remember to place the ignition in the
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- OFF position.
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer. The VIN is required for
authorized dealer replacement of keys.
Programming And Requesting Additional
NOTE:
Key Fobs
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
Programming the key fob may be performed by an serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer. authorized dealer.
Key Fob Screw Location  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY NOTE:

A key which has not been programmed is also
WARNING!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the trans-
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle mission into PARK, apply the parking brake, and
engine. The system does not need to be armed or Ú page 245. remove the key fob from the vehicle. When
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. In
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. IGNITION SWITCH case you switch off the vehicle and the transmis-
The system uses ignition keys which have an sion is not in PARK, a warning message will
1. Place the gear selector in PARK. appear on the cluster which indicates you to shift
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, 2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) the transmission into PARK and then you can
only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can position. remove the key within 15 seconds. If 15 seconds
be used to start and operate the vehicle. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock expire, you have to rotate the key from the STOP
cylinder. (OFF/LOCK) position to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is
position and come back to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it
position in order to remove the key.
indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
CAUTION! dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not for a number of reasons. A child or others could
compatible with some aftermarket Remote be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
Starting systems. Use of these systems may be warned not to touch the parking brake,
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of brake pedal or the gear selector.
security protection.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
Ignition Switch Positions
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have could operate power windows, other controls,
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. 1 — AVV (START) or move the vehicle.
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
3 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
The doors can be locked or unlocked from inside pull the handle out from the bottom, then slide the
CAUTION! the vehicle by using the door lock/unlock switch. door towards the rear of the vehicle until it locks
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always  To lock the doors, push down on the switch. into place and cannot go any farther. The turn
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
 To unlock the doors, pull up on the switch. signal.
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
AUTO UNLOCK D OORS Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the 2
NOTE: Canadian Cargo Vehicle — If Equipped
This feature unlocks both front doors (on Canada
When opening the driver’s door with the key in the cargo vehicles), or all doors (on passenger and U.S. Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
ignition and the ignition placed in the STOP (OFF/ cargo vehicles) when the driver door is opened. to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the
LOCK) position, a chime will sound to remind you to cargo unlock button on the key fob once to unlock
remove the key. NOTE: the passenger/cargo area (side lateral sliding
If the front passenger door, or the rear or side door doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
DOORS is opened, only the rear or side door is unlocked. flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
SLIDING SIDE D OOR Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger
POWER D OOR L OCKS Vehicle
On cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted
with a spring-loaded latch that stops the door from Push the mechanical key release button to expose
opening any farther. To lock the door in place, the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver
simply push the door as far as it will go; to release door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
it, pull forward firmly. counterclockwise to unlock all doors.
Opening And Closing From Outside The Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo
Vehicle
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to expose
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the
the mechanical key and insert the key into the
Passenger Vehicle And U.S. Cargo Vehicle —
driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
If Equipped
counterclockwise to unlock the front doors. Insert
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Push and release the unlock button on the key fob the key into the rear door exterior lock cylinder and
to unlock all doors. Push and release the cargo turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the rear
unlock button on the key fob to unlock only the rear doors.
cargo doors. To open one of the sliding side doors,
Closing/Locking With A Key Fob Opening And Closing From The Inside
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to Opening:
lock all doors, including the cargo area (side lateral
Pull the interior door handle to unlock the door,
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights
then pull the handle and slide the door towards the
will flash to acknowledge the lock signal.
rear of the vehicle until it can go no farther.
Horn activation settings after a key fob lock
Closing:
command can be adjusted manually through the
Uconnect system Ú page 79. Pull the interior door handle to release the door
and then push it towards the front of the vehicle.
Locking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger
Vehicle Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
Key Emergency Lock Device
Push the mechanical key release button to expose The sliding side doors are provided with a device
the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver for locking all the doors using an emergency lock in The device is released and the doors can be
door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key case of a power fault. The device is located on the opened as follows:
clockwise to lock all doors. rear of the sliding door. If the power is restored:
Locking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo Vehicle The device can be engaged with the sliding side  By remote control.
doors open in one of the following positions:
Push the mechanical key release button to expose  Opening a front door by inserting the key into
the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver  KEL Device not engaged (doors unlocked) the key cylinder.
door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key  KEL Device engaged (insert the ignition key If the power is not restored:
clockwise to lock the front doors. Insert the key into blade into the lock and rotate clockwise), doors
the rear door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key  Opening the driver side door by mechanical key
locked
clockwise to lock the rear doors. and the other doors (passenger's side and
sliding side door) by pulling the inner handle.
Closing And Locking From Outside
If the child lock was engaged and the previously
Grab the side door handle and push towards the described locking procedure was carried out,
front of the vehicle. Once the side door is secured operating the internal handle will not open the door
in the full closed position, use one of the prior but will only realign the door lock knob. To open the
locking methods to lock the sliding side doors. door, the outside handle must be pulled. The door
lock/unlock button is not disabled by the
engagement of the emergency lock.
DOUBLE R EAR S WING D OORS Opening/Closing The First Swing Door

The rear double swing doors are fitted through a
From The Outside
fastening system which stops them when they To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push
reach an opening angle of approximately 90 the cargo unlock button on the key fob and then
degrees. pull the exterior handle to the left. To close the
door, turn the key in the lock or push the lock 2
button on the key fob.
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing
Door From The Inside
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door Child Lock System
release mechanism located on the left rear trim To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
panel. Lock System
Opening The Second Swing Door 1. Open the rear door.
After having opened the first door, pull the handle 2. Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the
located on the door face toward the rear of the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position.
Rear Door Check Strap Location vehicle.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees,
push the locking device (one on each side) and
CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK door.
simultaneously open the doors. The rear door SYSTEM The device remains engaged even if the doors are
check strap will automatically re-engage when the This system prevents the sliding side doors from unlocked remotely. This system prevents the
door is closed. being opened from the inside. The child locks are sliding side doors from being opened from the
Using the key fob, you can do the following: located on the rear of the sliding side doors. inside.
 For cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors: The child locks can only be engaged/disengaged
WARNING!
centrally unlock the load compartment (sliding with the sliding side door open.
side doors + rear swing doors), centrally lock all Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
the doors. Remember that the rear doors can only be
 For versions with swing door: local unlocking/ opened from the outside when the
locking. Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
NOTE: downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering The front driver and passenger seats can be
manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked column in position, pull the steering column adjusted forward and rearward, and (if equipped),
position, roll down the window, and open the door control up until fully engaged. may be reclined and the height and lumbar can be
using the outside door handle. adjusted. The forward/rearward adjustment bar is
WARNING! located at the front of the seat, near the floor.
STEERING WHEEL Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Height, lumbar and recline adjustment controls are
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen this warning may result in serious injury or death.
or shorten the steering column. The steering
column control is located on the steering column,
below the turn signal lever. SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside Manual Front Seat Adjustments
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people 1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
ously injured or killed.
3 — Recliner Adjustment Knob
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your 4 — Lumbar Adjustment Knob
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Steering Column Control belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
To unlock the steering column, push the steering
column control downward. To tilt the steering  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
column, move the steering wheel upward or and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Recliner Adjustment FOLDING REAR SEAT — I F EQUIPPED
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be the seat. To recline the seatback, rotate the knob
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo
rearward without leaning back. To return the space.
result in loss of control which could cause a seatback to its normal upright position, lean
collision and serious injury or death. forward, rotate the knob forward until the seatback 1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side 2
is in the upright position. of seat), and lift it upward until the seatback
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
releases.
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Lumbar Support — If Equipped
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt. This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar adjustment
knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of
Forward And Rearward Adjustment the seatback. Rotate the knob forward to increase
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near and rearward to decrease the desired amount of
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat lumbar support.
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat
is in the desired position. Then, using body WARNING!
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt Seatback Release Lever Locations
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
might not be adjusted properly and you could 2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
The height adjustment lever is located on the be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push 3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located
vehicle is parked.
down on the front lever to adjust the front of the on the lower outboard side of seat and lift the
seat up or down.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that seat for extended cargo space.
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED NOTE:

 This feature is only available with the ignition
The controls for the front heated seats
key in MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
are located on the lower outboard side
of the seat.  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
Seat Release Lever diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Heated Seat Control Button
 Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
The LED on the switch illuminates when the heated or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
seat is on. Push the switch a second time to shut overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
the heating elements off. heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Extended Cargo Space
4. Reverse order for original setting.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS Front Adjustment Rear Adjustment — If Equipped

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the The outboard and center head restraints are
injury by restricting head movement in the event of head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push adjustable and removable. To raise the head
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted the adjustment button, located on the base of the restraint, push and hold the adjustment button,
so that the top of the head restraint is located head restraint, and push downward on the head located on the base of the head restraint and pull
restraint. upward on the head restraint. To lower the head 2
above the top of your ear.
restraint, push and hold the adjustment button,
WARNING! and push downward on the head restraint till the
desired height is reached.
 All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until WARNING!
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
injury in the event of a crash. the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior
 Head restraints should never be adjusted to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or Front Head Restraint
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Outboard Head Restraint

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Front Removal Rear Removal — If Equipped

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it To remove the rear head restraints, push the
can go then push the release button and the release button and adjustment button while
adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head the headrest, put the head restraint posts into the
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes while pushing the release button and
holes and push downward. Then adjust the head adjustment button. Then adjust it to the
restraint to the appropriate height. appropriate height.
WARNING! WARNING!
Center Head Restraint
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
1 — Release Button collision or hard stop could cause serious collision or hard stop could cause serious
2 — Adjustment Button injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant restraints in a location outside the occupant
WARNING! compartment. compartment.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
collision or hard stop could cause serious injury the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always Follow the reinstallation instructions above Follow the reinstallation instructions above
securely stow removed head restraints in a prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
location outside the occupant compartment. seat. seat.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION any point while using your Uconnect system.
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice 2
Commands and tips you need to know to control  “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Recognition system’s status. 1 — Push To Mute
GET S TARTED 2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate 3 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, And Navigation
your Voice Recognition system.
4 — Push To End Call
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
Uconnect 3
passenger conversations are examples of noise
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
that may impact recognition. © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
while facing straight ahead. Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command. For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
 You can interrupt the help message or system
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada) Ú page 245.
Voice Command from the current category.
MIRRORS VANITY MIRROR Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature

The driver and passenger sun visors are located on The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
visor can be rotated downward or up against the block out the sun.
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
door glass. Your vehicle may be equipped with a 1. Fold down the sun visor.
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
courtesy mirror located on the passenger sun 2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
visor.
on the view through the rear window. 3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be mirror to extend it.
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the OUTSIDE MIRRORS
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
the day position (toward the windshield). of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Manual Mirror Adjustment
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Manual Outside Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE:

The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever Operation of the power mirrors is only available
be folded forward or rearward to help avoid to adjust the mirror. with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
damage. position.
Manual Mirror Control Lever

Folding Mirrors Power Mirror Controls
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
1 — Neutral Position
CAUTION! The power mirror controls are located on the mirror 2 — Driver Mirror Select Position
flag trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the 3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the
full rearward position to resist damage when left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the 4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
entering a car wash or a narrow location. control knob in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
turn the control to the center (neutral) position to
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
prevent accidental mirror movements.
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 28.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS NOTE:

On vehicles sold in Canada, the rear parking lights,
HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER clearance lights, sidemarker, plate lights and
wheel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pull
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) the multifunction lever again to turn the low beams
the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, position. back on.
headlight beam selection and the passing lights.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — FLASH-T O-P ASS
the steering column. I F E QUIPPED You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will come on This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
whenever the ignition is in the ON position, the and remain on, until the lever is released.
headlight switch is off, and a turn signal has not
been activated. PARKING L IGHTS
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the These lights can only be turned on with the ignition
multifunction lever to the O (off) position. in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or removed.
Multifunction Lever NOTE: Move the end of the multifunction lever to O (off)
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime position, and then to the headlight position.
HEADLIGHTS Running Lights will automatically deactivate The indicator light telltale in the instrument panel
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the when the front fog lights are turned on. comes on. The lights stay on until the next ignition
multifunction lever to the headlight position. When  For vehicles not sold in Canada, the low beams cycle is performed.
the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, and side/taillights will not be on with DRLs.
taillights, license plate light, clearance lights and
FOLLOW ME H OME/HEADLIGHT DELAY
 In certain markets, the DRLs can be
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn When this feature is selected, the driver can
programmed on or off through the Uconnect
off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction choose to have the headlights remain on for a
system Ú page 79.
lever back to the O (off) position. preset period of time after the engine is turned off.
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
Activation Push the switch once to turn the fog lights on. Push Left Switch
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP the switch a second time to turn the fog lights off.  Push the left switch to the left to turn off the
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction NOTE: auto dome lights. The dome lights will not auto-
lever toward the steering wheel within two If the ignition is placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) matically turn on when a door is opened.
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the position, the fog lights will also turn off.  Push the left switch to the right to turn on the
activation of the lights will be extended by 30 dome lights. 2
seconds. The activation of the lights can be TURN SIGNALS
extended to a maximum of 210 seconds. Right Switch
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
Deactivation activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side  Push the right switch to the left to turn on the
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper left map light.
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds. operation.  Push the right switch to the right to turn on the
NOTE: right map light.
FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED If either light remains on and does not flash, or
The fog light switch is located on the center stack there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
of the instrument panel, just above the climate outside light bulb.
controls.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash five times then automatically turn
off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Map/Dome Lights

COURTESY/INTERIOR LIGHTS 1 — OFF
These lights are mounted between the sun visors 2 — AUTO/Dome
on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by 3 — Left Map
Fog Light Switch Location
pushing the corresponding switch. 4 — Right Map
Rear Lights Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights

Operation
Cargo Vehicle
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically
Lateral Roof Light
when you open the rear swing doors, and goes out
This is located on the right side of the load when you close them.
compartment.
 Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the
Rear Roof Light light off when the doors are open.
This is located on the rear panel of the load  Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
compartment. the light on when the doors are open.
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
when you open the sliding doors and the rear swing
doors, and goes out when you close them. The cargo compartment light comes on 1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
automatically when the swing doors are opened 2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
 Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the and turns off when the doors are closed.
light off when the doors are open. 3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
 Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch WIPERS AND WASHERS 4 — Pull For Front Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
the light on when the doors are open.
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
Passenger Vehicle the right side of the steering column. The front
The interior lamps are located in the center of the wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located NOTE:
roof, above the second row seating, and in the roof, on the end of the lever. The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
in the center of the rear load area. with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
FRONT WIPER O PERATION Windshield Washers

CAUTION!
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever rearward
toward the driver to activate the washers. The  Always remove any buildup of snow that
within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end prevents the windshield wiper blades from
of the lever upward from the O (off) position to the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles
after the lever is released. returning to the off position. If the windshield
first detent for intermittent wiper operation. Rotate wiper control is turned off and the blades 2
the switch at the end of the lever upward to the cannot return to the off position, damage to
second detent for low-speed wiper operation, and
WARNING!
the wiper motor may occur.
to the third detent for high-speed operation. To Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch at could lead to a collision. You might not see other
the end of the lever back down to the O (off) vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden Mist
position. icing of the windshield during freezing weather, Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
warm the windshield with the defroster before make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
CAUTION! and during windshield washer use. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
Always remove any buildup of snow that release for a single wiping cycle.
prevents the windshield wiper blades from NOTE:
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield CAUTION! The Mist feature does not activate the washer
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot  Turn the windshield wipers off when driving pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
return to the “park” position, damage to the through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield. The wash function must be used in
wiper motor may occur. the windshield wipers may result if the wiper order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
control is left in any position other than off. For information on wiper care and replacement,
Intermittent Wiper System  In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
see Ú page 197.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first switch and allow the wipers to return to the
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent park position before turning off the engine. If
speed. When the vehicle's speed increases, the the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
time between the wipes will decrease. freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
(Continued)
REAR WIPER AND WASHER — CLIMATE CONTROLS A/C Button

IF EQUIPPED The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
when the A/C system is engaged. The
switch, located at the middle of the windshield circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
A/C can be deselected manually
wiper/washer lever. located on the instrument panel below the radio.
without disturbing the mode control selection.
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
ring upwards to operate the rear window
wiper as follows:
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
 In intermittent mode when the front window
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
wiper is not operating through the outlets into the cabin.
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
 In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the
front window wiper) when the front window Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be
wiper is operating turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
 In continuous mode while vehicle is in REVERSE
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE gear glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in speed if needed.
the same way.
 If your air conditioning performance seems
Rear Windshield Washer Operation Manual Climate Controls
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
Pushing the windshield wiper lever System Maintenance condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
forward activates the rear window an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
turned on at least once a month for about
pushed for more than quarter of a and through the condenser.
10 minutes.
second to activate the rear window wiper as well.
When the windshield wiper lever is released, the Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
wipers will return to normal operation. before the Summer.
Recirculation Button Front Defrost Setting

CAUTION!
Press and release this button to change Use Defrost mode with maximum
the system between recirculation mode temperature settings for best  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
and outside air mode. The Recirculation windshield and side window defrosting abrasive window cleaners on the interior
indicator and the A/C indicator and defogging. Turn the knob to the surface of the window.
illuminate when the Recirculation button is Front Defrost position. Air comes from the  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
2
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside windshield and side window demist outlets. window.
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable Push and release the Rear Defrost Temperature Control
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if Control button to turn on the rear Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
conditions exist that could create fogging on the window defroster and the heated the air forced through the climate system.
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be outside mirrors (if equipped). An
The temperature increases as you turn
deselected manually without disturbing the mode indicator will illuminate when the rear window
the temperature control knob clockwise.
control selection. Continuous use of the defroster is on. The rear window defroster
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of The temperature decreases as you turn
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation CAUTION! the temperature control knob
mode may automatically adjust to optimize counterclockwise.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
customer experience for warming, cooling, damage to the heating elements: Blower Control
dehumidification, etc.
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear There are four blower speeds. Use this
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners control to regulate the amount of air
lead to excessive window fogging. The on the interior surface of the window. Use a forced through the system in any mode
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping you select. The blower speed increases
conditions exist that could create fogging on the parallel to the heating elements. Labels can as you move the control clockwise from the OFF
inside of the windshield. be peeled off after soaking with warm water. position.
(Continued)
Mode Control Floor Mode Winter Operation

Rotate this control to change the airflow Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
distribution mode. The airflow amount of air is directed through the performance, make sure the engine cooling
distribution mode can be adjusted so air defrost and side window demister system is functioning properly and the proper
comes from the instrument panel outlets. amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist Ú page 240. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
Mix Mode
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows: during Winter months is not recommended
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, because it may cause window fogging.
Panel Mode and side window demister outlets. This
Air comes from the outlets in the setting works best in cold or snowy Vacation/Storage
instrument panel. Each of these outlets conditions that require extra heat to the For information on maintaining the Climate Control
can be individually adjusted to direct the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining system when the vehicle is being stored for an
flow of air. The air vanes of the center comfort while reducing moisture on the extended period of time, see Ú page 233.
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and windshield.
Window Fogging
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air OPERATING T IPS Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow glass in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
from these outlets. the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
suggested control settings for various weather
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Bi-Level Mode conditions.
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
Air comes from the instrument panel Summer Operation as fogging may occur.
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount The engine cooling system must be protected with Outside Air Intake
of air is directed through the defrost and a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
side window demister outlets. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
NOTE: overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- MS.90032) is recommended Ú page 240.
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
and warmer air from the floor outlets. months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS

The Climate Control system filters out dust and
Set the mode control to
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced (Floor Mode). If
when needed. windshield fogging
Cold Weather
starts to occur, move 2
Operating Tips Chart
the control to
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS (Mix Mode).
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT Glove Compartment
(A/C) on, and blower
Hot Weather And on high. Roll down the STORAGE Dash Storage
Vehicle Interior Is Very windows for a minute The dash storage is located on the right side of the
Hot
Glove Compartment
to flush out the hot air. instrument panel above the glove compartment.
Adjust the controls as The glove compartment is located on the
needed to achieve passenger side of the instrument panel.
comfort. To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Turn (A/C) on and
Warm Weather set the mode control to NOTE:
(Panel Mode). The glove compartment handle is equipped with a
lock. To lock the glove compartment, insert the
Cool Sunny Operate in mechanical key into the glove compartment
(Bi-Level Mode). handle lock cylinder and turn the key to the lock
Set the mode control to position and remove the key. Use the reverse
sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Cool & Humid (Mix Mode) and Dash Storage
Conditions turn on (A/C) to
keep windows clear.
Overhead Console Storage USB C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED POWER O UTLETS

There is additional shelf storage above the front The USB port is located on the instrument panel Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
sun visors. below the Climate Controls. This feature allows an power outlets that can be used to power cellular
external USB device to be plugged into the USB port. phones, small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a key symbol are powered when the
ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position,
while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
connected directly to the battery and powered at
all times.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
Overhead Console Storage Location The power outlets are located in between the
driver and front passenger seats.
Media Hub USB Port
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets

Load Compartment Power Outlet

CAUTION!
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on
the left side of the rear cargo compartment.  Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
Depending on trim levels, the power outlet location power from the vehicle's battery, even when
may vary. not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's 2
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
 All accessories connected to the battery
Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations powered outlets should be removed or turned
1 — #15 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V (Key) off when the vehicle is not in use. Leaving
devices connected overnight will drain the
2 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet
vehicle’s battery.
12V (Battery)
3 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
Load Compartment Power Outlet 12V (Key) coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
CAUTION! caution.
WARNING!
Do not connect devices with power higher than  After the use of high power draw accessories,
180 Watts to the outlet. Using unsuitable To avoid serious injury or death:
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
adapters may damage the outlet.  Only devices designed for use in this type of (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. must be driven a sufficient length of time to
 Do not touch with wet hands. allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WINDOWS NOTE: Automatic Window Features

 The key off power delay feature will allow the Auto-Down Feature
POWER W INDOW CONTROLS — power windows to operate for up to three
The driver and passenger door power window
minutes after the ignition is turned off. This
I F EQUIPPED feature is canceled when either front door is
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time, then
The window switches on the driver’s door control opened.
release, and the window will go down automatically.
all door windows.  The power window switches remain active for up
To stop the window from going all the way down
to three minutes after the ignition switch has
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
been turned off. Opening either of the vehicle’s
down on the switch briefly.
front doors will cancel this feature.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
WARNING! Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with and release; the window will go up automatically.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- To stop the window from going all the way up
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or switch briefly.
others could be seriously or fatally injured. To close the window part way, lift the window
Power Window Switches Children should be warned not to touch the switch briefly and release it when you want the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear window to stop.
1 — Front Window Control Switches selector.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
2 — Rear Window Lock Switch (If Equipped)  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
3 — Rear Window Control Switches (If Equipped) or in a location accessible to children. A child back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
could operate power windows, other controls, window switch again to close the window.
The passenger door windows can also be operated or move the vehicle.
by using the single window switch on the WARNING!
passenger door trim panel. If the vehicle is There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
equipped with rear power windows, a single is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure
opening and closing switch on the rear passenger to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
doors for passenger window control is provided. from the window path before closing.
Power Windows System Initialization Proceed as follows for initialization:

The power windows may be reset if any of the 1. Completely close the driver's door window,
following occurs: keeping the window switch pushed for at
least five seconds after the (upper) end of
 On the front doors:
travel position.
 Fuse or battery are disconnected when the
2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger's 2
window is moving
window switches.
 50 window movements without ever closing
the window Rear Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
 On the rear doors (in addition to the conditions The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
for the front doors): Window Bar Grates
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
 Fuse or battery are disconnected when the the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
window is moving controls, push and release the window lockout WARNING!
button (the indicator light on the button will turn The metal grates over the sliding door windows
 The auto-reverse system is activated while
on). To enable the window controls, push and are designed to protect you in the event of an
the window is moving and the door is
release the window lockout button again (the accident. Modification or removal of the grates
opening
indicator light on the button will turn off). could lead to serious injury or death.
 50 window movements without ever closing
the window WINDOW B AR G RATES — IF EQUIPPED
 One door opening with the window moving, This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates
WIND B UFFETING
without ever closing the door over the sliding door windows. This feature is a part Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
 Three doors opening with the window in of the vehicle’s safety system, and is designed to of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
motion. During these maneuvers, the upper protect you and your passengers in the event of an in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
stop position is never reached accident. with the windows down in certain open or partially
open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If wind buffeting occurs, open
the front windows together to minimize the
buffeting.
HOOD
OPENING
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the
instrument panel and in front of the driver's
door.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location Hood Prop Rod

3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in
hood slot to secure the hood in the open
CLOSING
position.
WARNING!
CAUTION! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
closed position before closing the hood. Damage could open when the vehicle is in motion and
Hood Release Lever may occur. block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into
the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push up the safety latch lever to release it, CAUTION!
before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
CARGO AREA FEATURES NOTE:

Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo WARNING!
REAR CARGO T IE-DOWNS area.  Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
To make it easier to secure your load, there are WARNING! placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
hooks fixed to the floor (if equipped). cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. 2
 To help protect against personal injury, passen-
gers should not be seated in the rear cargo  Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
area. The rear cargo space is intended for load top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
should sit in seats and use seat belts. stop or accident.
 Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for
a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
child seat to come loose. A child could be The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
for child seat tethers. The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version) should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
The weight and position of cargo and
rack crossbars.
passengers can change the vehicle’s center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of NOTE:
control resulting in personal injury, follow these If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
guidelines for loading your vehicle: dealer can order and install Mopar® crossbars
built specifically for this roof rack system.
 Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to the Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
left door or left door center pillar. crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
 Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
as possible. vehicle load capacity.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version) (Continued)
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,

located at the upper edge of each crossbar, WARNING! CAUTION!
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft Cargo must be securely tied down before driving  Loads should always be secured to crossbars
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars. your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off first, with tie down loops used as additional
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting securing points if needed. Tie loops are
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. in personal injury or property damage. Follow intended as supplementary tie down points
Once the crossbar is in the desired position, the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
re-tighten it with the wrench to lock the crossbar your roof rack. the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb
into position. wheels frequently to be sure that the load
NOTE: remains securely attached.
 To help control wind noise when the crossbars
CAUTION!
 Long loads that extend over the windshield,
are not in use, place the front and rear cross-  To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
bars approximately 24 inches (61 cm) apart. DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack with large frontal area should be secured to
Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved without the crossbars deployed. The load both the front and rear of the vehicle.
by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft should be secured and placed on top of the
 Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm). crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
 If the crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed necessary to place the load on the roof, place
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), a blanket or other protective layer between
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
you may experience interruption of satellite the load and the roof surface.
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
radio reception. For improved satellite radio  To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, large flat loads and may result in damage to
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over do not exceed the maximum roof rack load the cargo or your vehicle.
the satellite radio antenna. capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
(Continued)
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

1. Speedometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
 Indicates vehicle speed. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling cluster display, which offers useful information to
coolant. You may want to call an authorized the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
2. Fuel Gauge
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats opening/closing of a door will activate the display
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the Ú page 201. for viewing, and display the total miles, or
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the kilometers, in the odometer. The steering wheel
ON/RUN position. mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
 The fuel pump arrow symbol CAUTION! main menus and submenus. You can access the
points to the side of the vehicle specific information you want and make selections
where the fuel door is located. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could and adjustments.
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
3.Temperature Gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the LOCATION AND CONTROLS
 The temperature gauge shows engine vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
The instrument cluster display features a driver
coolant temperature. Any reading within the the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
interactive display that is located in the instrument
normal range indicates that the engine the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
cluster.
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher
service.
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be 4. Tachometer
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the  Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
normal operating range. per minute (RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 40.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 41
The menu items described below are an example button for two seconds to reset displayed/ 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to
of what can be found in the vehicle's menu: selected features that can be reset. store the new setting and go back to the
 Dimmer  Up And Down Arrow Buttons: previously selected submenu option.
 Speed Beep 6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to
Using the up or down arrow button allows
the main menu (short hold) or the main screen
 Trip A / B (options are selectable through the you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
(longer hold).
steering wheel stalk) NOTE:
 Buzzer Volume If equipped with a Uconnect system, some of the CHANGE ENGINE OIL — IF EQUIPPED 3
menu items will be present in the radio head unit
The system allows the driver to select information Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
Ú page 79.
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”
instrument panel to the right of the steering Dimmer:
message will display in the instrument cluster
column: With headlights on and without entering in the display. The engine oil change indicator system is
menu, push the up or down arrow button to duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
increase or decrease the brightness of the change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
instrument panel, graphics and command buttons. your personal driving style.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Unless reset, this message will continue to display
Submenu: each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily,
display the first submenu option. push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the
2. Push and release the up or down arrow scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
button (by single pushes) to scroll through all procedure.
the submenu options.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to not start the engine).
 MENU Button select the displayed submenu option and to
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three
Push and release the MENU button for a time open the relevant setup menu.
times, within 10 seconds.
longer than one second to access/select the 4. Push and release the up or down arrow 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
information screens or submenu screens of a button (by single pushes) to select the new
main menu item. Push and hold the MENU setting for this submenu option.
NOTE: setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
If the indicator message illuminates when you start approach the desired value. screen or hold the MENU button down to return to
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu the standard screen without storing.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. screen or hold the MENU button down to return to Buzzer Volume
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY MENU the standard screen without storing.
With this function, the volume of the acoustic
To cancel the setting: signal which accompanies the display of failure/
I TEMS
1. Briefly push the MENU button, “ON” will flash warning can be adjusted according to seven levels.
Speed Beep in the display. To set the desired volume:
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or 1. Push the MENU button, the previously set
2. Push the down arrow button, “OFF” will
km/h); the driver is alerted when this limit is volume level will flash on the display.
flash in the display.
exceeded.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the 2. Push and release the up or down arrow
To set the desired speed limit:
menu screen or hold the MENU button down to button to adjust.
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will return to the standard screen without storing.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu
show the wording (SPEED BEEP) and the unit
screen or hold the MENU button down to
(MPH) or (km/h) previously set. Trip B Data return to the standard screen without storing.
2. If the function is on, push and release the up This function can be used to activate (On) or
or down arrow button to select the required deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip) Seat Belt Buzzer
speed limit and then push MENU to confirm. Ú page 43. Only shows in the instrument cluster display if the
To switch the function On/Off: seat belt reminder was previously deactivated by
NOTE: 1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will an authorized dealer.
The speed may be set in the range from 20 to flash On or Off according to the previous NOTE:
125 mph (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previ- setting. This is a one-time occurrence to enable the
ously chosen unit. acoustic signal.
The setting will increase/decrease by five units 2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button to select.
each time the up or down arrow button is
pushed. Hold down the up or down arrow
button to automatically increase/decrease the
Exit Menu Start Of Trip Procedure

This is the last function that closes the cycle of With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button
settings listed in the menu screen. for over two seconds to reset trip information.
1. Pushing the MENU button briefly will return Exit Trip
the display to the standard screen without 1. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the
storing. values have been displayed or hold the MENU
2. Push the down arrow button to return to the button for longer than one second.
first menu item on the display. 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to
3
go back to the menu screen or push and hold
TRIP COMPUTER  A short button push displays the different values. the MENU button (approximately one second)
to go back to the main screen without storing
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument  A long button push resets the system and then
settings.
cluster. It features a driver interactive display starts a new trip.
(displays information such as trip information, New Trip TRIP FUNCTIONS
range, fuel consumption, average speed, and To reset:
travel time). Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of
 Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the new trip).
NOTE: system manually.
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
display and menus to customize the information  When the “Trip distance” reaches
 Range
displayed in the cluster Ú page 79. 99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the
“Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and  Trip distance A
TRIP BUTTON 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.  Average Economy A
The TRIP button, located on the right steering  Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets  Instantaneous Economy
column stalk, can be used to display and to reset the system.  Average speed A
the previously described values. NOTE:  Travel time A (driving time)
If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the
screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions
will be reset.
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: NOTE:

The range depends on several factors: driving
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
 Trip distance B
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
 Average Economy B instrument panel together with a dedicated
roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle (load,
 Average speed B tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
 Travel time B (driving time) account the above notes. These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
NOTE: Travel Distance
and/or alternative to the information contained in
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B This value shows the distance covered since the the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
Data”). Range and Instantaneous Economy cannot last reset. carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information
be reset. in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
Average Fuel Consumption
VALUES D ISPLAYED active telltales will display first if applicable. The
This value shows the approximate average
system check menu may appear different based
consumption since the last reset.
Range upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
This indicates the distance which may be traveled Current Fuel Consumption Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is RED WARNING LIGHTS
driving conditions will not change. The message “----” constantly updated. The message “----” will appear
will appear on the display in the following cases: on the display if the vehicle is parked with the Air Bag Warning Light
engine running. This light will turn on for four to eight
 Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
 The vehicle is parked for a long time with the Average Speed seconds as a bulb check when the
engine running. This value shows the vehicle's average speed as a ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
function of the overall time elapsed since the last MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is
reset. either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected by an
Travel Time authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
This value shows the time elapsed since the last will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
reset. the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
Brake Warning Light NOTE: The light also will turn on when the parking brake
The light may flash momentarily during sharp is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
This warning light monitors various
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level position.
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If conditions. The vehicle should have service NOTE:
the brake light turns on it may indicate performed, and the brake fluid level checked. This light shows only that the parking brake is
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the necessary. cation.
Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. Battery Charge Warning Light 3
WARNING!
If the light remains on when the parking brake has This warning light will illuminate when
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is the battery is not charging properly. If it
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates dangerous. Part of the brake system may have stays on while the engine is running,
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You there may be a malfunction with the
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / immediately. soon as possible. This indicates a possible
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this problem with the electrical system or a related
case, the light will remain on until the condition has Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System component.
been corrected. If the problem is related to the (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when Door Open Warning Light
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along This indicator will illuminate when one or
may be felt during each stop. with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS more door(s) are not fully closed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking system is required.
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be NOTE:
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning position to the ON/RUN position. The light should will also be a single chime.
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
in the master cylinder has dropped below a should then turn off unless the parking brake is
specified level. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
Light upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the
minutes or until the engine is able to cool, light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
This warning light will illuminate to whichever comes first. continue to drive normally.
inform of a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) WARNING!
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature of system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission If you continue operating the vehicle when the
the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
safely and completely stopped and the temperature reading does not return to normal, illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. turn the engine off immediately and call for service come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
The light should turn off. If the light remains on with Ú page 183. components and cause a fire.
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be Oil Pressure Warning Light
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
This warning light will illuminate to CAUTION!
service as soon as possible.
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is light turns on while driving, stop the Continuous driving with the Transmission
running, immediate service is required and you vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
may experience reduced performance, an possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A eventually cause severe transmission damage
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your chime will sound when this light turns on. or transmission failure.
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
check. If the light does not come on during starting, When the ignition is first placed in the
checked under the hood.
have the system checked by an authorized dealer. ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning chime will sound and the light will turn
If Equipped
Light on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
This warning light will illuminate to warn
This warning light warns of an seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
of a high transmission fluid
overheated engine condition. If the Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
temperature. This may occur with
engine coolant temperature is too high, and a chime will sound Ú page 137.
strenuous usage such as trailer towing.
this indicator will illuminate and a single If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
Transmission Fault Warning Light If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
serviced as soon as possible to restore the Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does
message in the instrument cluster The warning light switches on and a
not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
display and a buzzer) to indicate a message is displayed to indicate that
RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the light
transmission fault. Contact an the tire pressure is lower than the
inspected by an authorized dealer.
authorized dealer if the message remains after recommended value and/or that slow
restarting the engine. Low Fuel Warning Light pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
Engine Oil Level Warning Light When the fuel level reaches tire duration and fuel consumption may not be 3
approximately 2–3 gal (9–11 L) this guaranteed.
This warning light appears on the panel
light will turn on, and remain on until Should one or more tires be in the condition
when the engine oil level falls below the
fuel is added. mentioned above, the display will show the
minimum recommended value. Restore
the correct engine oil level or contact an Generic Warning Light indications corresponding to each tire.
authorized dealer for service. The Generic Warning Light will CAUTION!
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS illuminate if any of the following
conditions occur: Engine Oil Pressure Do not continue driving with one or more flat
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
Light Parking Sensor Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Fail/ vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
Intervention, Generic Failure on Trailer, or Air Bag tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
This light monitors the ABS. The light will the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
telltale recovery.
turn on when the ignition is placed in the authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and The telltale will blink in case of an Air Bag Warning
may stay on for as long as four seconds. Light Failure. Contact an authorized dealer
immediately for service. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
system is not functioning and service is required.
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
However, the conventional brake system will
pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different
continue to operate normally if the brake warning
size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or
light is not on.
tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire functioning properly. Always check the TPMS Warning Light (MIL)
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them the TPMS to continue to function properly. Diagnostic System called OBD II that
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly monitors engine and automatic
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can CAUTION! transmission control systems. This warning light will
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
The TPMS has been optimized for the original before engine start. After placing the ignition to the
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures ON/RUN position, if there is a problem with the Sentry
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
and warning have been established for the tire Key System, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable This condition will result in the engine being shut off
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s system operation or sensor damage may result after two seconds. If the bulb does not come on when
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even when using replacement equipment that is not turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket the condition checked promptly.
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
NOTE:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket security system has detected an attempt to break
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction into the vehicle.
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure tire sealant it is recommended that you take
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute sensor function checked. cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
and then remain continuously illuminated. This after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle the light stays on through several typical driving
Vehicle Security Warning Light styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the This warning light will illuminate when normally and will not require towing.
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire the vehicle security system has When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may detected an attempt to break into the serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
occur for a variety of reasons, including the vehicle. of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
installation of replacement or alternate tires or vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
continuously with the engine running, a GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, Turn Signal Indicator Lights
referenced above, can reach higher and the vehicle has been driven several miles When the left or right turn signal is
temperatures than in normal operating (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph activated, the turn signal indicator will
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as flash independently and the
slowly or park over flammable substances such possible to have the problem diagnosed and corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could corrected. will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
result in death or serious injury to the driver,  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up 3
occupants or others. cator Light come on momentarily each time the (right).
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/ NOTE:
RUN position.
CAUTION!  A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
 Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even turn signal on.
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the if it was turned off previously.
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
severe catalytic converter damage and power sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is This indicator light will illuminate when
required.  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event. the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 24.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. This indicator light will illuminate when
The ESC Indicator Light in the the front fog lights are on Ú page 24.
instrument cluster will come on when Each time the ignition is turned to
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC
MAR/ON/RUN position, and when ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
is activated. It should go out with the engine off previously.
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
Cruise Control Indicator Light — WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
If Equipped system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
Speed Warning Indicator Light — (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
This indicator light will illuminate when
If Equipped information to assist your service technician in
the cruise control is activated making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
Ú page 60. When Set Speed Warning is turned on,
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
the speed warning telltale will illuminate
NOTE: dealer for service as soon as possible.
in the instrument cluster with a number
There will be no change in the indicator light when matching the set speed. When the set
the desired speed is set. CAUTION!
speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along
with pop-up message of speed warning exceeded.  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS further damage to the emission control
Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
High Beam Indicator Light instrument cluster display Ú page 40. system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
This indicator light will illuminate to NOTE: before any emissions tests can be performed.
indicate that the high beam headlights The number “55” is only an example of a speed
are on. With the low beams activated, that can be set.  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
push the multifunction lever forward running, severe catalytic converter damage
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to system monitors the performance of the
pass” scenario. emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS on as part of a normal bulb check.
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
connection port to allow access to information things will happen:
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
related to the performance of your emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent
controls. Authorized service technicians may need  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
vehicle registration.
to access this information to assist with the then return to being fully illuminated until you
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This 3
emissions system Ú page 78. and Maintenance (I/M), this check means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
WARNING! (MIL) is functioning and is not on when station.
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
 ONLY an authorized service technician should  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
is ready for testing.
connect equipment to the OBD II connection illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or The OBD ll may not be ready if your vehicle was position or start the engine. This means that
service your vehicle. recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll system can proceed to the I/M station.
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
OBD II connection port, such as a your vehicle may fail the test. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
driver-behavior tracking device, it may: an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
 Be possible that vehicle systems, which you can use prior to going to the test station. failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
including safety related systems, could be To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could you must do the following: in order for your OBD II system to update. A
occur that may result in an accident 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, recheck with the above test routine may then
involving serious injury or death. but do not crank or start the engine. indicate that the system is now ready.
 Access, or allow others to access, infor- NOTE:
mation stored in your vehicle systems, If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
including personal information. start this test over.
52
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, of PARK. NOTE:
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
your seat belts. NORMAL STARTING has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
WARNING! and release it when the engine starts. If the engine the battery to ensure a full battery charge
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition during the crank cycle.
access to an unlocked vehicle. switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 2. Place the ignition in the AVV (START) position
15 seconds, then repeat this procedure. and release it when the engine starts.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child COLD WEATHER OPERATION 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds,
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. place the ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
Children should be warned not to touch the To ensure reliable starting at low temperatures, position, wait 10 to 15 seconds to allow the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- use of an externally powered electric engine block starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
sion gear selector. heater (available from an authorized dealer) is Starting procedure.
recommended.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
To prevent possible engine damage while starting allow the starter to cool for at least
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
could operate power windows, other controls,
cranking when the ambient temperature is less
or move the vehicle.
than -31°F (-35° C) and the oil temperature
sensor reading indicates an engine block heater CAUTION!
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION has not been used. The message “Plug In Engine To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
Heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or when the ambient temperature is below -25°F time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
NEUTRAL (N) position before you can start the (-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting to reminder.
any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 53
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART CAUTION!

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
If the engine fails to start after you have followed To prevent damage to the starter, do not cord.
the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” continuously crank the engine for more than 10 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
procedure, and has not experienced an extended seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow
park condition as identified in “Extended Park trying again. away behind the driver’s side headlamp.
Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold NOTE:
it there. Crank the engine for no more than 10 AFTER S TARTING
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case  The engine block heater cord is a factory
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the
MAR (ON/RUN) position, release the accelerator
will decrease as the engine warms up. heater cords are available from an authorized 4
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED  The engine block heater will require 110 Volts
WARNING! The engine block heater warms the engine and AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
permits quicker starts in cold weather. element.
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical  The engine block heater must be plugged in at
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. least one hour to have an adequate warming
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. effect on the engine.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to engine block heater is recommended. For ambient WARNING!
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine
matic transmission cannot be started this block heater is required. Remember to disconnect the engine block
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic The engine block heater cord is routed under the heater cord before driving. Damage to the
converter and once the engine has started, hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. the steps below to properly use the engine block electrocution.
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, heater:

booster cables may be used to obtain a start 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind
from a booster battery or the battery in the driver’s side headlamp).
another vehicle. This type of start can be 2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 181. heater cord in place.
54 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the Brake Warning Light
A long break-in period is not required for the engine few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This in the instrument cluster display will illuminate.
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your should be considered a normal part of the break-in NOTE:
vehicle. and not interpreted as a concern. Please check
 When the parking brake is applied and the auto-
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
matic transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
desirable. PARKING BRAKE Fully release the parking brake before
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the attempting to move the vehicle.
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to  This light only shows that the parking brake is
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low leave an automatic transmission in PARK. applied. It does not show the degree of brake
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. application.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. up as firmly as possible. To release the parking front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For
climate conditions under which vehicle operations button, then lower the lever completely. vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and apply the parking brake before placing the gear
quality grades Ú page 240. selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
CAUTION! difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral parking brake should always be applied whenever
Oil in the engine or damage may result. the driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
WARNING! CAUTION! WARNING!

 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the If the Brake System Warning Light remains on  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. with the parking brake released, a brake system injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
access to an unlocked vehicle.
always come to a complete stop, then apply
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended the parking brake, shift the transmission into
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. You must press and hold the brake pedal while ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
Children should be warned not to touch the shifting out of PARK. transmission is locked in PARK, securing the 4
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear vehicle against unwanted movement.
selector. WARNING!  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
or in a location accessible to children. A child NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than vehicle.
could operate power windows, other controls, idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
or move the vehicle. the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
before driving; failure to do so can lead to control of the vehicle and hit someone or dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
brake failure and a collision. something. Only shift into gear when the others could be seriously or fatally injured.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly Children should be warned not to touch the
 Always fully apply the parking brake when pressing the brake pedal.
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an (Continued) sion gear selector.
automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do  Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
damage or injury. dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from The 9-speed transmission has been developed to
CAUTION! NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after is stopped or moving at low speeds. vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. optimize the customer’s driving experience and
9-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above very specific driving situations and conditions.
idle speed. both beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster display. To select a gear range, Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your push the lock button on the gear selector and the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. move the lever rearward or forward. You must also stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out pedal when shifting between these gears.
of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped
KEY I GNITION P ARK I NTERLOCK or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park for normal driving. Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts can
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in NOTE: be made using the ERS shift control. Moving the gear
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the full In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector into the ERS “-”/”+” position (beside the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) (key removal) position. The key selector position and the actual transmission gear DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the
can only be removed from the ignition when the (for example, driver selects REVERSE while driving current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents
ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, and forward), the position indicator will blink continu- automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode,
once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. ously until the selector is returned to the proper toggling the gear selector forward “-” or rearward “+”
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT position, or the requested shift can be completed. will change the highest available gear Ú page 59.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts NOTE:
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the with environmental and road conditions. The REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the transmission electronics are self-calibrating; forward) it is probably in the ERS “+”/”-” position
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the
PARK, the ignition must be in the MAR (ON/RUN) be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
position (engine running or not) and the brake and precision shifts will develop within a few the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
pedal must be pressed. hundred miles or kilometers. the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

before shifting the transmission to PARK, WARNING!
otherwise the load on the transmission locking  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
When exiting the vehicle, always: control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
 Apply the parking brake.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
 Shift the transmission into PARK.
Gear Selector pressing the brake pedal. 4
 Turn the engine off.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
Gear Ranges
 Remove the ignition key. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
out of PARK or NEUTRAL. WARNING! the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
NOTE:  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
always come to a complete stop, then apply
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to for the parking brake. Always apply the the parking brake, shift the transmission into
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler- parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the
ating. This is especially important when the engine guard against vehicle movement and possible ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
is cold. injury or damage. transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
PARK (P)  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
The engine can be started in this range. Never others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. move the gear selector out of PARK with the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
If necessary, apply the parking brake prior to brake pedal released. Make sure the trans- vehicle.
placing the vehicle in PARK. mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. (Continued)
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure

WARNING! that you have properly engaged the transmission CAUTION!
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with into the PARK position: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-  When shifting into PARK, push the lock button other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is on the gear selector and firmly move the gear can cause severe transmission damage.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or selector all the way forward until it stops and is For Recreational Towing Ú page 75.
others could be seriously or fatally injured. fully seated.
Children should be warned not to touch the For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 187.
 Look at the transmission gear position display
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
sion gear selector.
 With brake pedal released, verify that the gear DRIVE (D)
 Do not leave the ignition key in or near the selector will not move out of PARK. This range should be used for most city and
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
dren). A child could operate power windows, REVERSE (R)
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
other controls, or move the vehicle. This range is for moving the vehicle backward. transmission automatically upshifts through all
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come forward gears.
to a complete stop.
CAUTION! When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
NEUTRAL (N) as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
 Before moving the transmission gear selector conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake the parking brake and shift the transmission into the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector PARK if you must exit the vehicle. select a lower gear range Ú page 59. Under these
could result. conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from WARNING! performance and extend transmission life by
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
this can damage the drivetrain. ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
practices that limit your response to changing operating limits, the transmission controller may
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
of the vehicle and have a collision. engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the In the event of a momentary problem, the NOTE:
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may transmission can be reset to regain all forward The torque converter clutch will not engage until
illuminate and the transmission may operate gears by performing the following steps: the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to
differently until the transmission cools down. 1. Stop the vehicle. 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine
During cold temperatures, transmission speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
operation may be modified depending on engine not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
and transmission temperature as well as vehicle 3. Turn the ignition OFF. not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. The
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. torque converter clutch will function normally once
engine and transmission to achieve maximum the transmission is sufficiently warm.
5. Restart the engine.
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
problem is no longer detected, the The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the 4
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm highest available gear. For example, if you set the
transmission will return to normal operation.
Ú page 59. Normal operation will resume once transmission gear limit to FIFTH gear, the
the transmission temperature has risen to a transmission will not shift above FIFTH gear, but
NOTE:
suitable level. will shift through the lower gears normally.
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
Transmission Limp Home Mode that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
Transmission function is monitored electronically possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diag- any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected nostic equipment to assess the condition of your DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
that could result in transmission damage, transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this authorized dealer service is required.
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed Torque Converter Clutch DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction A feature designed to improve fuel economy has gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp been included in the automatic transmission on the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter the gear selector forward “-” or rearward “+” will
an authorized dealer for service without damaging engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This change the top available gear, which will be
the transmission. may result in a slightly different feeling or response displayed in the instrument cluster.
during normal operation in the upper gears. When To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector
the vehicle speed drops or during some to the DRIVE position.
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
WARNING! WARNING!
 Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
Do not downshift for additional engine braking wheel travel are considered normal and do not Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could indicate that there is a problem with the power and with the engine off to prevent injury from
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, steering system. moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
causing a collision or personal injury. reading. Do not overfill. Use only the
 Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
manufacturer recommended power steering
steering pump may make noise for a short
fluid.
NOTE: amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick
To select the proper gear position for maximum fluid in the steering system. This noise should
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear be considered normal, and it does not in any
selector into the ERS position, then simply press way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
and hold it forward “-”. The transmission will shift Do not use chemical flushes in your power
to the range from which the vehicle can best be CAUTION! steering system as the chemicals can damage
slowed down. your power steering components. Such damage
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will increase is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
POWER STEERING the steering fluid temperature and it should be Warranty.
The standard power steering system provides avoided when possible. Damage to the power
increased vehicle response and ease of steering pump may occur. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
maneuverability. The system will provide indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled
mechanical steering capability if power assist is fluid from all surfaces Ú page 241.
lost.
POWER S TEERING FLUID C HECK
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under service interval is not required. The fluid should
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
these conditions, you will observe a substantial only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
increase in steering effort, especially at very low noises are apparent, and/or the system is not
25 mph (40 km/h).
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection
efforts through an authorized dealer. The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
U.S. Speed (mph)

WARNING!
 Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set subsequent tap of the button results in an
the system or cause it to go faster than you adjustment of 1 mph.
want. You could lose control and have an
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
accident. Always leave the system off when you
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
are not using it.
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
TO SET A D ESIRED SPEED Metric Speed (km/h)
Cruise Control Buttons 4
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has  Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
1 — On/Off reached the desired speed greater than 25 mph result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
2 — CAN/Cancel (40 km/h), push the SET (-) button and release. subsequent tap of the button results in an
3 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel Release the accelerator and the vehicle will adjustment of 1 km/h.
4 — SET (–)/Set Speed/Decel operate at the selected speed.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
NOTE: speed will continue to adjust until the button is
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed released, then the new set speed will be estab-
TO ACTIVATE lished.
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise button.
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument TO ACCELERATE F OR P ASSING
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system TO VARY THE SPEED S ETTING While the Cruise Control is set, press the
off, push the on/off button a second time. The To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
should be turned off when not in use. When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
set speed.
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease
the speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
Using Cruise Control On Hills TO DEACTIVATE PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST

The transmission may downshift on hills to A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button, SENSORS
maintain the vehicle set speed. or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
NOTE: Control system without erasing the set speed from fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and memory. that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction,
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or switch off erases the set speed from memory. from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive 55 inches (140 cm) from the center of the rear
without Cruise Control.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from
the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on
WARNING! IF EQUIPPED the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the The ParkSense system provides an audible
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your indication of the distance between the rear fascia/
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up
you could lose control and have an accident. Do (e.g. during a parking maneuver) Ú page 64.
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or The ParkSense system is automatically activated
slippery. when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As
the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle
decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
TO RESUME S PEED Interaction With Trailer Towing
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) The ParkSense system is automatically
button and release. Resume can be used at any deactivated when a trailer equipped by Mopar® is ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Locations
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h). automatically activated as soon as the trailer is
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
removed. If it does not happen, turning the key
ignition switch to STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
then to AVV (START) again would be needed. If a corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle
non-Mopar® trailer hitch is mounted, the sensor that would clear the underside of the vehicle
deactivation cannot be guaranteed. during the parking maneuver.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST

ALERTS
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to
the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle
is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park Assist System

SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
4
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as
the distance decreases
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the sensors' field of view • Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm)
• Adjustable volume level programmable through
personal settings in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 40
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display
Failure Sensor or system failures
• Message is displayed on instrument cluster
display (if equipped)
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is muted.

The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you
WARNING!
could damage the sensors.
FAILURE I NDICATIONS  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
or system is indicated, during REVERSE SYSTEM U SAGE PRECAUTIONS behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
gear engagement, by the instrument sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
NOTE:
panel warning icon. vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
 Ensure that the outer surface and the underside backing up. You are responsible for safety and
The warning icon is illuminated and a message is of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
displayed on the instrument cluster display (if must continue to pay attention to your
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
equipped) Ú page 44. the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system oper- serious injury or death.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously ating properly.
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
position. Failures are indicated immediately if they mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
tions could affect the performance of the assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
occur when the system is on. ParkSense system. when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
cluster display shall indicate that the ParkSense must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
system is unavailable, without reference to the dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor system not working properly. The ParkSense continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
fails, the entire system will be disabled. The system system might not detect an obstacle behind the detect the ball mount and hitch ball
is turned off automatically. fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indica- assembly, depending on its size and shape,
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK tion that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. giving a false indication that an obstacle is
 Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not behind the vehicle.
ASSIST SYSTEM
be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
while keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing causing a failure indication to be displayed in
nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. the instrument cluster display.
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the
CAUTION! screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. width of the vehicle and will show separate zones
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
unable to recognize every obstacle, including vehicle above the rear license plate. the vehicle. The following table shows the
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be The Rear Back Up Camera can also be activated approximate distances for each zone:
temporarily detected or not detected at all. when the vehicle is not in REVERSE through the Distance To The Rear
Obstacles located above or below the sensors Uconnect system Ú page 79. Zone
Of The Vehicle
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
NOTE: Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
If one of the rear cargo doors is not completely
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using closed, the Back Up Camera cannot provide an Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time accurate image of the area behind the vehicle. A 3 ft or greater 4
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- Green
dedicated message will appear on the Uconnect (1 m or greater)
mended that the driver looks over his/her display indicating the camera is not in the correct
shoulder when using ParkSense. position.
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off in WARNING!
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch the rear camera settings menu. When the vehicle Drivers must be careful when backing up even
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is is shifted out of REVERSE and the Camera Delay is when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
assembly presence in the sensor field of view. The navigation or audio screen appears on display be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
filtering operation must be performed only by an again. vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
authorized dealer. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
and Camera Delay is activated in the menu screen, your surroundings and must continue to pay
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA the camera image will continue to be displayed for attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
up to 10 seconds, unless the speed of the vehicle result in serious injury or death.
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
is in PARK, or the ignition is placed in the STOP
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
(OFF/LOCK) position.
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to
CAUTION! WARNING!
 To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
camera is unable to view every obstacle or or the tank is being filled.
object in your drive path.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be This is in violation of most state and federal
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
recommended that the driver look frequently
Fuel Filler Cap  A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
NOTE: You could be burned. Always place gas
NOTE: The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened containers on the ground while filling.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds while the fuel door is open. This feature operates
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with only when the sliding door is in a closed position
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the prior to opening the fuel door. CAUTION!
lens. 3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler  Damage to the fuel system or emissions
pipe. control system could result from using an
REFUELING THE VEHICLE 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel. improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly
The gas cap is located on the left side of the NOTE: fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure system and may cause the Malfunction Indi-
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
to use the correct replacement cap for this vehicle cator Light (MIL) to turn on, due to fuel vapors
the fuel tank is full.
escaping from the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door.  Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter- nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the  To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
clockwise. nozzle. “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
NOTE:  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) TIRE SIZE

 Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a  Type of vehicle
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the  Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH) represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read Replacement tires must be equal to the load
 If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL the VIN. capacity of this tire size.
may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled. GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING RIM S IZE
(GVWR) This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
VEHICLE LOADING size listed.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and I NFLATION P RESSURE 4
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or not exceed the GVWR. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
B-pillar. vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not GROSS A XLE W EIGHT RATING (GAWR)
CURB W EIGHT
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR. The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label exceed either front or rear GAWR. vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
affixed to the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
driver’s door. WARNING! front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
The label contains the following information: Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is before any occupants or cargo are added.
 Name of manufacturer important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving
 Month and year of manufacture
condition can result if either rating is exceeded.
 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) You could lose control of the vehicle and have a
 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear collision.
OVERLOADING NOTE: Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, the B-pillar or the rear of the driver's door for your
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR.
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
TRAILER TOWING The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
The best way to figure out the total weight of your of all cargo, consumables and equipment
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and In this section you will find safety tips and
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale information on limits to the type of towing you can
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR. reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
condition.
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the load as efficiently and safely as possible. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
the load evenly over the front and rear axles. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
coverage, follow the requirements and
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards the scale.
recommendations in this manual concerning
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or vehicles used for trailer towing. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
suspension components do not necessarily
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
increase the vehicle's GVWR. COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
LOADING The following trailer towing related definitions will and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
assist you in understanding the following exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 67.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its information:
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store WARNING!
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your It is important that you do not exceed the
items securely before driving. If weighing the vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded and tongue weight. The total load must be limited driving condition can result if either rating is
either GAWR, but the total load is within the so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 67. exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. and have a collision.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
the load on your vehicle. ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
Trailer Frontal Area with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
small and medium sized trailers.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied requirements.
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. Weight-Distributing Hitch
The weight-distributing hitch works by applying WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, 4
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and braking performance, and could result in a
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with collision.
friction associated with the telescoping motion to the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions more level ride, offering more consistent steering  Weight Distributing Systems may not be
while traveling. and brake control thereby enhancing towing compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual control also dampens sway caused by traffic and turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to crosswinds and contributes positively to tow dealer for additional information.
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
See chart on Ú page 71 for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM CAUTION! TOWING REQUIREMENTS

TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS) Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
NOTE: the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the drivetrain components, the following guidelines
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads are recommended.
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to CAUTION!
addresses:
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/ side which will cause loss of control of the  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
 ramtruck.ca (Canada) in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. The engine, axle or other parts could be
 rambodybuilder.com damaged. 4
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight  The tongue weight of the trailer. (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
ment put in or on your vehicle.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
NOTE: Servicing for the proper maintenance intervals
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer Ú page 189. When towing a trailer, never exceed
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Weight Distribution Ú page 221.
Towing Requirements — Tires

WARNING! WARNING!
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
 Make certain that the load is secured in the  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on compact spare tire.
trailer and will not shift during travel. When a grade. When parking, apply the parking
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive towing while using a full size spare tire.
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
control of your vehicle and have a collision. NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer the safe and satisfactory operation of your
wheels. vehicle.
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading  GCWR must not be exceeded.  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
can cause a loss of control, poor performance pressures before trailer usage.
 Total weight must be distributed between the
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure damage before towing a trailer.
following four ratings are not exceeded:
or tires.
 When replacing tires with a higher load carrying
 GVWR
 Safety chains must always be used between capacity they will not increase the vehicle's
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the  GTW GVWR and GAWR limits.
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle  For further information Ú page 217.
 GAWR
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
corners. utilized.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes NOTE:

CAUTION!
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking loaded, it should have its own brakes and they device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
and possible personal injury. should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do into water.
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
 An electronically actuated trailer brake  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
controller is required when towing a trailer with area.
distances.
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
not required. Wiring 4
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg). required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
WARNING!
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
 Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's trailer harness and connector.
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your NOTE: Four-Pin Connector
brake system and cause it to fail. You might Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
not have brakes when you need them and 1 — Ground
harness.
could have an accident. 2 — Park
The electrical connections are all complete to the
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping 3 — Left Stop/Turn
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
distance. When towing, you should allow for connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 4 — Right Stop/Turn
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
TOWING TIPS Electronic Range Select (ERS)

Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and  When using the ERS shift control, select the
backing up the trailer in an area located away from highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
heavy traffic. mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
Automatic Transmission maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The maintain the desired speed.
transmission controls include a drive strategy to  To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
Seven-Pin Connector the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or
1 — Backup Lamps select a lower gear range. vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
2 — Running Lamps NOTE: allow.
3 — Left Stop/Turn Using a lower gear range while operating the Cruise Control — If Equipped
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
4 — Ground  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
improve performance and extend transmission life
5 — Battery by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
6 — Right Stop/Turn This action will also provide better engine braking. speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
7 — Electric Brakes disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
4
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — AUTOMATIC DRIVING TIPS Traction

TRANSMISSION When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be Acceleration cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to following precautions should be observed:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
following the dolly manufacturer's occurs when there is a difference in the surface
are slushy.
instructions. traction under the front (driving) wheels.
 Slow down if the road has standing water or
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. puddles.
WARNING!
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the  Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
transmission in PARK. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden first become visible.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of  Keep tires properly inflated.
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate  Maintain sufficient distance between your
5. Release the parking brake. slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). collision in a sudden stop.
CAUTION! DRIVING THROUGH WATER
 DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
Driving through water more than a few inches/
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
the ground.
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING! CAUTION!
WARNING!  Driving through standing water limits your  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
Do not drive on or across a road or path where vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases through standing water. This will minimize
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm stopping distances. Therefore, after driving wave effects.
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road through standing water, drive slowly and
 Driving through standing water may cause
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink lightly press on the brake pedal several times
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or to dry the brakes.
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.  Failure to follow these warnings may result in (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. or foamy in appearance) after driving through 4
passengers, and others around you. standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
CAUTION! as this may result in further damage. Such
Shallow Standing Water
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through  Always check the depth of the standing water
Limited Warranty.
shallow standing water, consider the following before driving through it. Never drive through
Cautions and Warnings before doing so. standing water that is deeper than the bottom  Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
WARNING! serious internal damage to the engine. Such
 Determine the condition of the road or the
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
 Driving through standing water limits your path that is under water and if there are any
Limited Warranty.
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed obstacles in the way before driving through
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through the standing water.
standing water. (Continued)
(Continued)
78
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
NOTE:
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
For detailed information about your Uconnect potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access directly regarding software updates.
system, refer to Ú page 88. to your vehicle systems.
 To help further improve vehicle security and
NOTE: The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
Uconnect screen images are for illustration your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the vehicle owners should:
purposes only and may not reflect exact software most recent version of vehicle software (such as
for your vehicle.  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
Uconnect software) is installed.
support/software-update.html (US Resi-
CYBERSECURITY WARNING! dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Cana-
dian Residents) to learn about available
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may  It is not possible to know or to predict all of the Uconnect software updates.
be equipped with both wired and wireless possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle  Only connect and use trusted media
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
systems, including safety related systems, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
send and receive information. This information
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control USBs, CDs).
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly. could occur that may result in an accident Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
involving serious injury or death. cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
intercept information and private communications
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and  ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
without your consent Ú page 51.
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
communications. Vehicle software technology possibly contain malicious software, and if
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 79
UCONNECT SETTINGS UCONNECT 3/3 NAV S ETTINGS Push the Settings button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect system allows you to access
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the programmable features that may be equipped.
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
NOTE:
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.  Only one category may be selected at a time.
Many features can vary by vehicle.  The Back Arrow will change into a Done button if
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or any changes are made.
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the When making a selection, press one button on the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/ touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the desired menu, press and release the preferred
the control knob to scroll through menus and setting option until a check mark appears next to
change settings. Push the center of the control the setting, showing that setting has been 5
knob one or more times to select or change a Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On The selected. Once the setting is complete, either
setting. Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate press the Back Arrow button to return to the
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off previous menu, or press the X button on the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or down through the available settings.
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
System may also contain the word CAMERA.
80 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “With
Brightness Headlights On” setting will increase or decrease the brightness with the
headlight on; the “With Headlights Off” will increase or decrease the
brightness with the headlights off.
MULTIMEDIA 81

Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting will turn on or off the Trip B display on the Instrument Cluster
Display Trip B
Display.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display
in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
5
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
Custom
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
82 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
Voice Response Length When set to “Brief”, the system provides a shortened audio description. When
set to “Long”, the system provides the full audio description from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “w/Help” setting will show the
Show Command List
Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS receiver. The system will
Sync Time
control the time via GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). “Sync Time” must
Set Time & Format/Time Format be off for this setting to be available. The “12 h” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 h” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
MULTIMEDIA 83

This setting will allow you to set the date. The selectable options are “Date”,
Set Date
“Month”, and “Year”. You can also change the clock settings.
Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Safety/Assistance
When the Safety/Assistance button is pressed, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
NOTE:
Setting Name Description 5

This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
of REVERSE.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
 When the Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
84 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

This setting will sound the horn when the key fob’s Lock button is pushed. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn. The “1st Press” setting will sound the
Sound Horn With Lock
horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound
the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
Auto Door Locks
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h).
Key Off/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the radio remains on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “0 min” setting will shut the radio off the
Radio Off Delay moment the vehicle is turned off. The “20 min” setting will leave the radio on
for 20 minutes after the vehicle has been turned off or until one of the doors
has been opened.
MULTIMEDIA 85
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play music from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and
Balance
left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, 5
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
This setting will set how the radio behaves when the ignition is switched to
Auto-On Radio
ON/RUN. The available settings are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”.
86 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Paired Phones/Devices This setting will show which phones are paired to the Uconnect system.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
Tune Start
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
Channel Skip
display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Subscription Information
Link is a separate subscription.
MULTIMEDIA 87
Restore Settings
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its factory
settings. This setting can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
Clear Personal Data

5
When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, a pop-up will display asking if you would like to clear all personal data from the system.
NOTE:

This setting will display a pop-up that provides the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
88 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration
I DENTIFYING YOUR RADIO purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display

1 — SCREEN OFF Button
2 — Mute Button
3 — BACK Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
6 — VOLUME & On/Off Button
7 — RADIO Button
8 — MEDIA Button
9 — NAV/CAMERA Button
10 — PHONE Button
11 — MORE Button
MULTIMEDIA 89
Feature Description
Settings Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
BACK Push the BACK button to return to a previous page.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the
ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a
radio station.
Push the MORE button to access additional options such as “Trip” and
MORE
“Clock”.
Push the PHONE button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
PHONE
phone system.
Push the CAMERA button to see the rear view image on the radio display. If 5
NAV/CAMERA equipped, push the NAV button to access Navigation Mode, the system’s
built-in navigation feature.
Push the MEDIA button to enter Media Mode and access controls for external
MEDIA
audio sources.
Push the RADIO button to enter Radio Mode and access the system’s radio
RADIO
functions.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
VOLUME & On/Off
button to turn the system on or off.
Push the Mute button to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again
Mute
to turn the audio on.
SCREEN OFF Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the screen on or off.
90 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION  Glance at the screen only when it is safe to do NOTE:
so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is Many features of this system are speed
Safety Guidelines required, park in a safe location and set the dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
parking brake. use some of the touchscreen features while the
WARNING! vehicle is in motion.
 Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to Care And Maintenance
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and the product. Return it to an authorized dealer to Touchscreen
assume all risks related to the use of the repair.
Uconnect features and applications in this  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.)
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
and emergency vehicles.
involving serious injury or death.  Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
 Your system is a sophisticated electronic microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean
CAUTION! device. Do not let young children use your the touchscreen.
system.  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in breaking the touchscreen.  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
your music or sound system at loud volumes. alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
Exercise caution when setting the volume on tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
Please read the manual carefully before using the your system. manufacturer's precautions and directions
system. It contains instructions on how to use the Ú page 245.
system in a safe and effective manner.  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from your system. Besides damage to your
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
with any electronic device.
damage.
MULTIMEDIA 91
UCONNECT MODES The radio is equipped with the following modes: ENTER/BROWSE AND TUNE/SCROLL
CONTROL
 FM
RADIO MODE  AM Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio
Operating Radio Mode  SiriusXM® Radio
station frequency.
Push the Radio button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, FM/ SEEK FUNCTIONS
AM/SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the Seek Up And Seek Down
Radio mode. Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the
SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF next available station or channel. If the radio
The screen will switch on/off when the Volume & reaches the starting station after passing through
On/Off button is pushed.
5
the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
VOLUME/POWER
Fast Seek Up And Fast Seek Down
Rotate the Volume knob to adjust the volume.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Radio Mode
be set at the same volume level as last played. Seek Down button on the touchscreen to
1 — Preset Buttons Push the On/Off button to turn the system on or advance the radio through the available stations or
2 — All Presets Button off. channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the
3 — Seek Down Button next available station or channel when the button
4 — Radio Band Button (FM/AM/SXM) on the touchscreen is released.
5 — Direct Tune Button NOTE:
6 — Info Button Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
7 — Audio Settings Button Seek Down button will scan the different
8 — Seek Up Button frequency bands at a slower rate.
92 MULTIMEDIA
DIRECT TUNE SIRIUSXM® SATELLITE RADIO MODE www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca

Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the (Canada). All fees and programming subject to
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio change. Our satellite service is available to those
station or channel. at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and
D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
Press the available number button on the available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is
Once a number has been entered, any numbers available throughout our satellite service area and
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM®
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out. and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
INFO
This functionality is only available for radios
Press the Info button to display the current track Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Changing To equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
information. Press the X button to cancel this SiriusXM® receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
feature.
outside with a clear view to the sky.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
SETTING THE PRESETS satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
are activated by pressing any of the four Preset SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
buttons, located at the top of the screen. does not receive a signal in underground parking
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
garages or tunnels.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
commit into memory, press and hold the desired Manual kit. No Subscription
numbered button for more that two seconds or SiriusXM® services require subscriptions sold Radios equipped with a satellite receiver require a
until you hear a confirmation beep. separately after the trial included with the new subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your radio does not have the necessary subscription,
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of service at the end of your trial subscription, the the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
the radio screen. plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at only.
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
Pressing the All button on the radio home screen
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
MULTIMEDIA 93
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Replay
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. The replay function provides a means to store and
subscription, US visit www.UconnectPhone.com In addition to the tuning operation functions replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
or call: 1-800-643-2112 common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/ 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
Canada visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call: Weather button, and Favorite button functions are switched, content in replay memory is lost.
available in SiriusXM® Mode. Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
1-800-465-2001 (English)or 1-800-387-9983
(French) Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
NOTE:
replay time.
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the touchscreen any time during the Replay mode.
SXM button on the touchscreen.
5
When in Satellite mode:
 The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display SiriusXM®
the center. Satellite Radio
 The Program Information is displayed at the 1 — Browse Button
bottom of the Channel Number. 2 — Radio Bands Button
 The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed 3 — Direct Tune Button
below the Program Information. 4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
94 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to

pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
Play/Pause
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
Rewind
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
Forward therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to

Live
resume the playing of live content.
MULTIMEDIA 95
Favorites Browse In SXM Favorites

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
activate the Favorites Menu, which will time out edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction. settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® Favorites List and to configure the Alert Settings,
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X Channel List. along with providing a list of Channels currently
button. This screen contains many submenus. You can exit airing any of the items in the Favorites List.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite a submenu to return to a parent menu by pressing You can scroll the Favorites List by pressing the Up
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio the Back arrow. and Down arrows located at the right side of the
then uses this information to alert you when either All screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
the favorite artist or song is being played at any Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. pressing the All button, the following categories Remove Favorites
The maximum number of favorites that can be become available: Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
stored in the Radio is 50. 5
 Channel List: Press the Channel List to display screen. Press the Delete All button on the
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on Down arrows located on the right side of the deleted.
the touchscreen. screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating Alert Settings
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the  Genre: Press the Genre button on the touch- Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on screen to display a list of Genres. You can select you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
the touchscreen. any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List; visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
the radio tunes to a channel with the content in any of the SiriusXM® channels.
the selected Genre.
96 MULTIMEDIA
Game Zone Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon AUDIO SETTINGS

Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the Press the Audio button within the Settings Main
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with screen. Press the Delete All button on the Menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
set alerts. the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
On-Air deleted.
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings
On-Air List provides a list of Channels currently Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
airing any of the items in the Selections List, and The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio “Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
to that channel. upon score update” or both when one or more of
Add/Delete — If Equipped your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll List. Press the chosen Tune Start Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
league and a scroll list of all teams within the Tune Start begins playing the current song from
league will appear, then you can select a team by the beginning when you tune to a music channel 1 — Balance/Fade
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs 2 — Equalizer
appears for all teams that are chosen. the first time the preset is selected during that 3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
current song. 4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — Radio Off With Door
MULTIMEDIA 97
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Balance/Fade
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
Equalizer decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, or
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise. 5
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
Surround Sound — If Equipped
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
Auto Play connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports when it is turned on. Press
Off to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
Radio Off With Door driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
98 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS MEDIA M ODE AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or Once in Media Mode, press the Source button and
Operating Media Mode
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like the desired mode button. USB and Bluetooth® are
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® the Media sources available. You can select the
Satellite Radio trial required.) Browse button to be given these options:
Push the VR button and wait for the beep to say  Now Playing
a command. See some examples below:  Artists
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”  Albums
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”  Genres
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of  Songs
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,  Playlists
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system
 Folders
provides you with a list of commands.
You can select the Source button, Play/Pause
Media Operation button, or the Info button for artist information on
the current song playing.
1 — Seek Down Button
2 — Browse Button SEEK UP/SEEK DOWN
3 — Source Button Seek Up /Seek Down
4 — Play/Pause Button
5 — Info Button Press and release the Right Arrow button on the
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
6 — Next Button
release the Left Arrow button on the
7 — Seek Up Button
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of the
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA previous selection if the track is within the first few
button located on the faceplate. seconds of the current selection.
MULTIMEDIA 99
Fast Seek Up /Fast Seek Down INFO Browse

Press the Info button to display the current track Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
Press and hold the Right Arrow or Left Arrow
information. Press the X button to cancel this select Artist, Album, Genre, Song, Playlist or Folder
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode
feature. from the USB device. Once the desired selection is
will begin to fast forward or reverse through the
made, you can chose from the available media by
current track until the button on the touchscreen is USB Mode pressing the button on the touchscreen. Press the
released. USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel
TRACK SELECTION (BROWSE) Jump Drive cable into the USB port or by pushing the browse function.
the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Rotate the Browse button to scroll through and Media Mode, press the Source button on the Bluetooth® Mode
select a desired track on the device or USB. Press touchscreen and select “USB”. Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate
cancel the browse function.
NOTE:
with the Uconnect system Ú page 102.
The system supports only FAT32 or ExFAT 5
REPEAT formatted USB devices. The system does not Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
support devices with a capacity higher than 64GB. Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button located
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
The system does not support USB hubs connected
repeat the song selection. To cancel repeat, press Source button on the touchscreen and select
to the USB port of the vehicle. Connect your multi-
the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second Bluetooth®.
media device directly to the USB port using the
time.
specific connection cable for the device if NOTE:
SHUFFLE necessary. For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
Inserting USB Device tions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB or Bluetooth® Gently insert the USB device into the USB port. If
device in random order to provide an interesting you insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
100 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Commands Media Uconnect Phone supports the following features:  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Voice Activated Features Messages.
Uconnect offers connections via USB and
Bluetooth®. Voice operation is only available for  Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
connected USB devices. Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). access to connect to them quickly.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of  Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your NOTE:
the following commands and follow the prompts to incoming SMS messages. Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
switch your media source or choose an artist. Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
properly.
 “Change source to Bluetooth®” one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages. Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
 “Change source to USB” your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). automatically mute your radio when using the
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre  Calling back the last incoming call number (“Call Uconnect Phone.
Classical” Back”). For Uconnect customer support:
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming  US — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”). 877-855-8400
how the artist, album, song, and genre information  Canada — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
 Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
is displayed. John Smith Mobile”). 800-465-2001 (English)
PHONE MODE Screen Activated Features 800-387-9983 (French)
 Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.  Visit UconnectPhone.com
Overview
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, between the system and your mobile phone as you
in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect displayed on the touchscreen.
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your  Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
the system's microphone for private conversation.
mobile phone. are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
 Viewing and Calling contacts from recent call
logs.
MULTIMEDIA 101
Uconnect Voice Command Button  For certain operations, compound commands

WARNING! can be used. For example, instead of saying
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and when “Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and you are already in a call or want to make another the following compound command can be said:
assume all risks related to the use of the call. “Call John Smith mobile.”
Uconnect features and applications in this  For each feature explanation in this section,
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do only the compound command form of the voice
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident command is given. You can also break the
Voice Command features.
involving serious injury or death. commands into parts and say each part of the
Phone Operation command when you are asked for it. For
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your example, you can use the compound command
OPERATION form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the Voice commands can be used to operate the or you can break the compound command form
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the into two voice commands: “Search Contacts” 5
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts. remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the There are two general methods for how Voice when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone Command works: as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to 1. Say compound commands like “Call John meters away from you.
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) Smith mobile”.
mobile phone and one audio device can be used
HELP COMMAND
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
with the system at a time. If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
system to guide you to complete the task.
Uconnect Phone Button to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
You will be prompted for a specific command and following the beep.
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the phone mode and make calls, then guided through the available options. To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view  Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
phonebook, etc. When you push the button you will for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All
hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a or another prompt. Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the
command. VR button or Phone button on the radio faceplate.
102 MULTIMEDIA
CANCEL COMMAND  This pop-up only appears when the user

enters phone mode and no other device(s)
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
have previously been paired. If the system
and you will be returned to the main menu.
has a phone previously paired, even if no
You can also push the VR button or Phone button phone is currently connected with the
on your steering wheel when the system is listening system, this pop-up will not appear.
for a command and be returned to the main or
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
previous menu.
4. Search for available devices on your
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
PHONE  Press the Settings button on your mobile
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair phone.
your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile NOTE:  Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is enabled.
phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin
establishing a wireless connection between a phone to complete this procedure. to search for Bluetooth® connections.
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. 5. If “No” is selected and you still would like to
To complete the pairing process, you will need to pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN main screen.
phone compatibility information. position.
 Press the Add Device button.
2. Push the Phone button.
 Search for available devices on your
NOTE: Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
 If there are no phones currently connected below). When prompted on the phone,
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
if you would like to pair a mobile phone. tion request.
MULTIMEDIA 103
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress NOTE: 4. Press the Add Device button on the
screen while the system is connecting. During the pairing procedure, you may receive a touchscreen.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect NOTE:
system, select “Uconnect.” System to access your “messages” and “contacts”. If there is no device currently connected with the
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts system, a pop-up will appear.
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept with the Uconnect System.
the connection request from Uconnect Phone. 5. Search for available devices on your
You can also use the following VR command to Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
9. When the pairing process has successfully bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
completed, the system will prompt you to prompted on the device, or confirm the PIN
on the radio: shown on the Uconnect screen.
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone  “Show Paired Phones” 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
the highest priority. This phone will take NOTE: screen while the system is connecting.
precedence over other paired phones within Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect 7. When the pairing process has successfully
range and will connect to the Uconnect system system may interfere with the Bluetooth® completed, the system will prompt you to 5
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only connection. If this happens, simply repeat the choose whether or not this is your favorite
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® pairing process. However, first, make sure to device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
audio device can be connected to the delete the device from the list of phones on your the highest priority. This device will take
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove precedence over other paired devices within
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s range.
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and Bluetooth® settings.
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the NOTE:
Bluetooth® device. PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO For devices which are not made a favorite, the
DEVICE device priority is determined by the order in which
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the 1. Press the Media button on the faceplate to it was paired. The latest device paired will have the
phone priority is determined by the order in which begin. higher priority.
it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the 2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”. You can also use a following VR command to bring
higher priority. up a list of paired audio devices:
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio  “Show Paired Phones”
Devices screen.
104 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING button on the faceplate. PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device button. If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
within range. If you need to choose a particular 3. Press the Settings button located to the right the ability to download contact names and number
phone or audio device follow these steps: of the device name for a different phone or entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
1. Press the Settings button on the faceplate. audio device than the currently connected Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
device or press the preferred Connected Access Profile may support this feature. Your
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
Phone from the list. mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
buttons.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. permission for the Uconnect System to access your
3. Press to select the particular phone or the messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will 5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete will sync your contacts with the Uconnect System.
appear; press “Connect Phone”. Device button on the touchscreen.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
for supported phones.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A  To call a name from a downloaded mobile
FAVORITE phonebook, Ú page 108.
AUDIO DEVICE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources screen,  Automatic download and update of a phone-
press the Settings button located to the right book, if supported, begins as soon as the
of the device name for a different phone or Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
audio device than the currently connected to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
device or press the preferred Connected start the vehicle.
Phone from the list.  A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the Uconnect Phone.
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MULTIMEDIA 105
 Depending on the maximum number of entries TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED  Favorites

downloaded, there may be a short delay before  Mobile Phonebook
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
the Phone main screen.  Recent Call Log
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use. 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the  SMS Message Viewer
contact you want to remove from your
 Only the phonebook of the currently connected
favorites. This will bring up the options for that CALL CONTROLS
mobile phone is accessible. Favorite contact. The touchscreen allows you to control the following
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite. call features:
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The Phone Call Features
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection. The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile 5
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
favorites:
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press your mobile service provider for the features that
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and you have.
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect
buttons that appears on the list.
Phone:
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
 Redial Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the  Dial by pressing in the number
1 — Answer
Down Arrow button next to the selected  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call 2 — Mute/Unmute
number to display the options pop-up. In the by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”. 3 — Ignore
Back)
4 — Transfer
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
106 MULTIMEDIA
Other phone call features include: ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
 End Call NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
 Hold/Unhold/Resume When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the If a call is currently in progress and you have
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio another incoming call, you will hear the same
 Swap two active calls
system. Push the Uconnect Phone button on the network tones for call waiting that you normally
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY steering wheel, press the Answer button on the hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
touchscreen. Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
1. Press the Phone button on the faceplate. press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the press the Caller ID box to place the current call on
touchscreen. hold and answer the incoming call.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. NOTE:
4. Use the numbered buttons on the Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
touchscreens to enter the number and press system in the market today do not support
“Dial/Call”. rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
RECENT CALLS incoming call or ignore it.
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
the following call types:
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
 All Calls
button on the Phone main screen.
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received
 Outgoing Calls or Calls Made 1 — Answer Button MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
2 — Caller ID Box CALL IS IN PROGRESS
 Missed Calls
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
 Calls without a reply
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent number from the keypad, recent calls, SMS Inbox
Calls button on the phone main screen. or from the phonebooks.
You can also push the VR button on your steering To go back to the first call: Ú page 107
wheel and perform the above operation. For To combine two calls: Ú page 107
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
MULTIMEDIA 107
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS — IF EQUIPPED CALL TERMINATION Advanced Phone Connectivity

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active PHONE
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
hold, it will become the new active call. transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an
REDIAL ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
push the VR button and after the “Listening” button on the Phone main screen.
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that Phone
was dialed from your mobile phone. 5
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on VOICE COMMAND
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Phone CALL CONTINUATION
For the best performance:
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
at a time. on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition  Always wait for the beep before speaking
You can also push the Phone button to toggle has been switched to OFF.  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
between the active and held phone call. NOTE: would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
JOIN CALLS  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
until the phone becomes out of range for the
When two calls are in progress (one active and one Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to during a voice command period
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call button press the Transfer button on the touchscreen  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a when leaving the vehicle.
conference call.  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
 Low Road Noise
 Smooth Road Surface
 Fully Closed Windows
 Dry Weather Conditions
108 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
WARNING!
Audio quality is maximized under: say a command. See some examples below:
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting  “Call John Smith”
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed  “Dial 123 456 7890”
features and applications in this vehicle. Only  Low Road Noise  “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to  “Call back” (call previous incoming phone
 Smooth Road Surface
do so may result in an accident involving serious number)
injury or death.  Fully Closed Windows
 Dry Weather Conditions
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then
Even though the system is designed for many  Operation From The Driver's Seat
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
languages and accents, the system may not always Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and phone book. When a contact has multiple phone
work for some. loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
NOTE: network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
It is recommended that you do not store names in Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
motion. Push the VR button or Phone button and
Phone Voice Commands
Number and name recognition rate is optimized say:
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O” Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero). easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
Even though international dialing for most number phone paired to Uconnect system.)
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
number combinations may not be supported. been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
MULTIMEDIA 109
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
full implementation of the Message Access Profile Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
RESPONSES (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
Stuck in about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
Yes. See you later.
traffic. Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading directions, read text messages, and many other
Start without incoming text messages only. For further useful requests.
No. I’ll be late.
me. information on how to enable this feature on your BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Where are I will be 5 <or Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Okay. Manual”. Mobile phones may lose connection to the
you? 10, 15, 20,
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
25, 30, 45, Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
Are you there connection can generally be re-established by
Call me. 60> minutes with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
yet? restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
late. Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
I’ll call you I need See you in 5 text message. 5
later. directions. <or 10, 15, Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped POWER-UP
20, 25, 30, When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right 45, 60> to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your voice to send the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
now. minutes. text messages, select media, place phone calls change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
I’m lost. Thanks. and much more. Siri uses your natural language to using the system Ú page 245.
understand what you mean and responds back to
confirm your requests. The system is designed to
NOTE: keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the
Only use the numbering listed in the provided wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
110 MULTIMEDIA
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED Using Search

Press the Search button in the Main menu to
OPERATING N AVIGATION M ODE — start searching. The search screen will open,
I F EQUIPPED displaying the keyboard and the following buttons:
Planning A Route
Using the search bar provides a wide range of ways
to find places and then navigate to them. You can
search for your destination in different ways:
 A specific address
 A partial address
 A type of place
 A zip code
 A city to navigate to a city center
 A Point of Interest (POI) near your current location
 Latitude and longitude coordinates Navigation Search
1 — Back Button
2 — Search Box
3 — Type Of Search
4 — View Button
5 — 123?! Button
6 — Keyboard Layout Button
7 — List/Map Button
8 — Show/Hide Keyboard Button
MULTIMEDIA 111
Feature Description
Back Button Press the Back button to return to the previous screen.
Enter your search term in the search input box. As you type, matching
Search Box
addresses and Points of Interest (POI) are shown.
Press this button to change the type of search to any of the following:
 Whole Map: Select this option to search your current map with no limit to
the search radius. Your current location is the center of the search. The
results are ranked by exact match.
 Near Me: Select this option to search with your current GPS location as the
search center. The results are ranked by distance.
 In Town or City: Select this option to use a town or city as the center of your
5
search. Enter the town or city name using the keyboard on the touchscreen.
When you have selected the town or city from the results list, you can search
for an address or POI in that city.
Type Of Search  Along Route: When a route has been planned, you can select this option to
search along your route for a specific type of location, such as a POI cate-
gory. When prompted, enter the type of location and then select it in the
right-hand column to carry out the search.
 Near Destination: When a route has been planned, you can select this
option to use your destination as the center of your search.
 Latitude Longitude: Select this option to enter a pair of latitude and longi-
tude coordinates.
NOTE:
By default, the current map is searched. Once you have used search, the last
search type you selected is used.
112 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
View Button Press this button to return to the Map View or Guidance View.
Show/Hide Keyboard Button Press this button to show or hide the keyboard.
Select this button to switch between showing the results in a list or showing
List/Map Button
the results on the map.
Keyboard Layout Button Press this button to change your keyboard layout to another language.
Press this button to use numbers and symbols on your keyboard. Select the =\<
123?! Button button to toggle between the numbers and more symbols. Select the ABC button
to go back to the general keyboard.
Planning A Route — Searching For A City Center 2. Select the Points Of Interest tab.
When planning a route to a city center, you can
search for a town, city, or postal code.
1. Enter the name of the city or town.
City Center
Addresses List NOTE:

The city center location is shown on the map.
3. Select the city center POI.
4. Select “Drive”.
Searching For A City Center
MULTIMEDIA 113
2. Select a POI category, such as “Restaurant”. If Planning A Route — Searching By Entering

you select a POI category, only POIs from that Coordinates
category are shown. You can then select an 1. Press the Search Type button.
the desired POI. The location is shown on the
map. 2. Select “Latitude Longitude”.
3. To see more information about the POI, select 3. Type in the pair of coordinates:
the POI on the map and then select the Pop-up  Decimal values
Menu button. Select “More Information” on  Degrees, minutes and seconds
the pop-up menu.
 GPS standard coordinates
4. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive Button Drive button. 4. Select a suggestion for the destination.
5. To plan a route, select the Drive button.
As soon as you start driving, the Guidance View is
shown automatically. Planning A Route Using The Map
5
Planning A Route — Searching For A POI 1. Move the map and zoom in until you can see
You can search for a POI type, such as a restaurant the desired destination.
or tourist attraction. Alternatively, you can search 2. Select the destination by pressing and holding
for a specific POI Ú page 125. the screen for about one second.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the NOTE:
POI. A pop-up menu shows the nearest address.
NOTE: 3. To plan a route to this destination, select the
When searching, the whole map is selected. If you Drive Button Drive button.
want to change how the search is done, select the
button to the right of the search box. You can then
change where the search is done. For example,
along the route or in a city.
114 MULTIMEDIA
Planning A Route Using My Places You also have an option to view the parking lots in
1. Select the Main Menu button. a list by pressing the Menu button.
2. Select a parking lot from the map or the list.
2. Select “My Places”.
3. Select the Place you want to navigate to. For
example: Home.
Find A Gas Station

3. Select a gas station from the map or the list. By
opening the pop-up menu, you can add the gas
station as a stop on your route. You can also
Find A Parking Lot
plan a route to your chosen gas station by
3. To plan a route to your chosen parking lot, pressing the Drive button. Your system will
My Places select the drive button. plan a route, and guidance to your destination
will begin. The Guidance View will be shown
4. To plan a route to this Place, select the Drive Finding A Gas Station automatically once you start driving.
button. 1. Press the Main Menu button.
Changing Your Route
Finding A Parking Lot 2. Select “Gas Station”.
1. Press the Parking button from the Main NOTE: MAKING CHANGES TO YOUR ROUTE
Menu. You also have an option to view the gas stations in After planning a route, the route and destination
a list by pressing the Menu button. can be changed. There are various ways to change
NOTE:
If a route is planned, the map shows parking lots the route without the need to completely replan
near your destination. If a route isn’t planned, the the entire journey.
map shows parking lots near your current location. To change the current route, press the Current
Route button in the main menu.
MULTIMEDIA 115
CURRENT ROUTE MENU
Route Option Description
Clear Route Press the button to clear the currently planned route. The Current Route
Menu will close, and the screen will return to the Map View.
Press the button while driving on a planned route to show up to three
alternative routes on the Map View. Each alternative route shows the
difference in travel time.
Find Alternative
Select the chosen route by tapping on the time pop-up.
Press “Let’s GO”. Guidance to the destination will automatically begin, and
the Guidance View appears automatically as you begin driving.
Press the button to avoid an unexpected obstacle that is blocking the road 5
on the route. A new route will be found that avoids blocked roads.
You may be shown a maximum of two alternatives depending on the road
network between you and your destination.
The new route is shown on the Map View with the difference in travel time in a
pop-up.
Avoid Blocked Road
Select the new route by pressing the time pop-up. Guidance to your
destination will resume avoiding blocked roads, and the Guidance View will
appear automatically as you begin driving.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to find an alternative route around the blocked road if
none exists.
116 MULTIMEDIA

Press the button to avoid part of the current route.
You are shown a list of the sections that make up your current route.
Select the section of the route you want to avoid. A pop-up menu will appear
on the map showing the location of the instruction.
Avoid Part Of Road To avoid the chosen section of the route, select “Avoid”. A new route is
planned that will avoid the chosen route sections, and the new route will
appear in Map View.
NOTE:
To avoid more sections of the route, repeat the steps above. It may not be
possible to find an alternative route around the section if none exists.
Avoid Toll Roads And More Select the button to avoid some types of route features that are on your
currently planned route. These include ferries, toll roads and unpaved roads.
Press the button to see a list of turn-by-turn instructions for the planned
route.
The instructions include the following information:
 Current location
 Street names
Show Instructions  Up to two road numbers shown in road signs (if available)
 An instruction arrow
 An instruction description
 The distance between two consecutive instructions
 Exit number
 The full addresses of stops on your route
MULTIMEDIA 117

Press the button to add a stop to the route.
You can add a stop by selecting a point on the map. In Map View, zoom in on
Add Stop To Route the map and press and hold to select a location. Then, select the pop-up
menu button and press “Add to Current Route”.
You route will be recalculated to include your stop.
Press the button to change the type of route used to plan the route. The
route will be recalculated using the new route type selected.
You can select the following types of routes:
 Fastest Route
Change Route Type
 Shortest Route 5
 Most Eco-Friendly Route
 Avoid Interstate Highways
You can set the default route type in the Settings menu.
Press the button to see the list of stops for your current route. You can
change the order of the stops on your route by pressing “Edit Stops”. Use the
Up and Down arrows to change the order of your stops. The route will be
recalculated with the stops in that changed order.
Reorder Stops
NOTE:
You can also delete stops from the route by pressing the Edit Stops button and
then press the Delete button. The stop will be removed from the route, and the
route will be recalculated.
118 MULTIMEDIA

Press button to watch a preview of the planned route or track.
Pay Route or Track Preview NOTE:
This feature is not available while driving.
Stop Route Preview Press button to stop the preview of the planned route.
Voice Command — If Equipped USING VOICE CONTROL The following example shows how to use voice
control to plan a journey to your Home address:
ABOUT VOICE COMMAND WARNING!
1. Push the Voice Recognition button on the
Instead of pressing the touchscreen to control your ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel to turn on the microphone.
Navigation system, you can use your voice to wheel. You have full responsibility and assume A screen will pop up with examples of com-
control navigation. all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
mands.
For example, to switch to 2D view, you can say features and applications in this vehicle. Only
“2D view”. use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to NOTE:
do so may result in an accident involving serious Press the Help button in the Main menu then press
To view a list of available commands, press the
injury or death. “What can I say?” to see a full list of commands.
Help button in the Main menu and then press
“What can I say?”. 2. When you hear a beep, say a command of your
choice. For example, you can say “Navigate
home”.
MULTIMEDIA 119
NOTE: Guidance View

For accurate results, speak normally without trying The Guidance View is used to guide you along the
to articulate words in an unnatural way. If there is route to your destination. As soon as you start
excessive road noise, for example, you may need driving, your Navigation system will immediately
to speak directly into the microphone. start guiding you to your destination with spoken
3. If the command is correct, say “Yes”. instructions and visual instructions on the
NOTE: touchscreen. You can also see your current
If the command is incorrect, say “No” and repeat location and details along your route, including 3D
the command after you hear the prompt and tone buildings in some cities. The Guidance View is
again. Your Navigation system plans a route from normally in 3D. To show a 2D map with the map
your current location to your destination. To stop moving in your direction of travel, change the 2D
your Navigation system from listening out for and 3D default settings Ú page 123.
Guidance View
further commands, say “Cancel”. NOTE: 5
When you have planned a route and the 3D 1 — Switch View Button
Guidance View is shown, select the switch view 2 — Instruction Panel
button to change to the Map View and use the 3 — Route Bar
interactive features.
4 — Zoom Button
5 — Main Menu Button
6 — Speed Panel
7 — Current Location
120 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Select the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Switch View Button
Guidance View.
Press this button to view the following information:
 The direction of your next turn
Instruction Panel
 The distance to your next turn
 Lane guidance at some intersections
The Route Bar is shown when you have planned a route. The Route Bar
contains arrival information, such as the estimated time of arrival, the length
Route Bar of drive time from your current location, and information about the next stop,
if you have stops on the route. The bottom of the Route Bar represents the
current location and shows the distance to the next stop on your route.
This symbol shows the current location. By pressing the icon, the location will
Current Location
be saved.
Press the Speed Panel button to view the following information (if available):
 The speed limit at your location
 The name of the street you are driving on
Speed Panel
NOTE:
If you drive more than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed Panel
turns red. If you drive less than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed
Panel turns orange.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to show the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
MULTIMEDIA 121
Advanced Lane Guidance There are two types of lane guidance:

NOTE:  Lane images
Lane guidance is not available for all intersections  Instructions in the status bar
or in all countries.
Your Navigation system helps you prepare for
highway exits and junctions by showing the correct
driving lane for your planned route.
As you approach an exit or junction, the lane you
need is shown on the screen and in the instruction Map View
panel.
1 — Back Button
2 — Switch View Button
3 — Zoom Button 5
Advanced Lane Guidance 4 — Main Menu Button
5 — Selected Locations
Map View 6 — Current Location
The Map View is shown when you have no planned 7 — Your Route
route. You can use Map View the same way as you
might look at a traditional paper map. You can
move around the map using gestures, and zoom
using the zoom buttons. The map shows your
current location and many other locations such as
your My Places Ú page 126.
122 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Press the Back button to return to an overview of the route. If no route is
Back Button planned, pressing this button moves the map to put your current location at
the center.
Symbols are used on the map to show the destination and saved places
Ú page 126.
Map symbols include:
Map Symbols  Your destination
 Your home location
 A stop on your route
 A location saved in My Places
Select the Traffic Information button to display information about traffic
Traffic Information — If Equipped
delays.
Press and hold the Selected Location button to select a location on the map.
Selected Location Select the Pop-up Menu button to show options for the location, or select the
Drive button to plan a route to the location.
Current Location This symbol shows your current location on the map.
If you have a planned route, it will appear on the map. You can select the route
Your Route to clear it, change the route type, add a stop, or save changes to your route
Ú page 114.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to open the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
Press the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Switch View Button
Guidance View.
MULTIMEDIA 123
Voices  Read Foreign Street Names Out Loud (if  Automatic Zoom: Select “Automatic Zoom” to
equipped): Use this setting to control whether change how your system zooms in Guidance
ABOUT VOICES foreign street names are read out loud as part of View when you approach a turn or intersection.
Your Navigation system uses sound for some or all navigation instructions. Zooming in can make the turn or intersection
of the following: easier to drive. The following options are avail-
CHANGING THE VOLUME LEVEL able:
 Driving directions
To change the volume of your Navigation system,  Zoom in to next turn
 Warnings that you set use the Volume knob on the radio when an
 Based on road type
By selecting “Settings” in the main menu, then instruction is being given.
selecting “Voices,” you can change the settings for  None
Settings
how voice instructions are given. Instruction ARRIVAL INFORMATION
settings include the following: ABOUT SETTINGS
In the settings menu, select “Arrival Information”
 Read Early Instructions Out Loud: This setting You can change the way your Navigation system to change the following settings: 5
allows to you to hear early instructions. For looks and behaves. Most of the settings on your
example, an early instruction could be, “After  Show Remaining Distance: Select this setting to
system can be accessed by pressing the Settings show the remaining distance left to travel in the
two miles, take the exit right”.
button in the Main Menu. arrival information panel during navigation.
 Read Road Numbers Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether road APPEARANCE  Show Remaining Time: Select this setting to
numbers are read out loud as part of navigation show the remaining time left to travel in the
To change how your navigation screen looks,
instructions. arrival information panel during navigation.
select “Appearance” in the settings menu. From
 Read Road Sign Information Out Loud (if here, you can change these features:  Switch Between Distance And Time Automati-
equipped): Use this setting to control whether cally: Select this setting to control the automatic
 Switch To Night Colors When Dark: Select this
road sign information is read out loud as part of switching between remaining distance and
setting to make your system automatically
navigation instructions. remaining time in the arrival information panel.
switch to night colors when it gets dark.
 Read Street Names Out Loud (if equipped): Use
this setting to control whether street names are
read out loud as part of navigation instructions.
124 MULTIMEDIA
SHOW ON ROUTE GUIDANCE VIEW STYLE  Fastest Route

In the settings menu, select “Show On Route” to Select this setting to choose between 3D and 2D You can choose whether you would like the
see any of the following options in the route bar: versions of the Guidance View. Both the 2D and 3D Navigation system to choose the fastest route to
Guidance Views move in your direction of travel. the destination.
 Parking: Select this setting to see parking lots
on your route. In 3D Guidance View, you can choose to use the 3D  Shortest Route
 Gas Stations: Select this setting to see gas car icon or an arrowhead as the current location You can choose whether you would like the
stations on your route. indicator. By default, the 3D Guidance View shows Navigation system to choose the shortest route
the 3D car icon. by distance to the destination.
 Stops: Select this setting to see stops on your
route.  Most Eco-Friendly Route
VOICES SETTING
You can choose whether you would like the
SHOW PREVIEWS OF HIGHWAY EXITS Select this setting to change how instructions are
Navigation system to choose the route that will
read out loud Ú page 123.
Select this setting to control the full screen preview consume the least amount of energy.
when you approach highway exits. ROUTE PLANNING  Avoid Interstate Highways
AUTOMATIC MAP VIEW SWITCHING Select this setting to control how your system plans You can choose whether you would like the
routes. The following options are available: Navigation system to avoid all highways while
Automatic changing of views is on by default. For navigating to the destination.
example, when an alternative route is being  Always Take the Fastest Route
suggested, the map will automatically switch to You can choose whether you would like the SOUNDS AND WARNINGS
Map View, and when you start driving, your map Navigation system to always default to the Select this setting to change the following sounds
will automatically switch to Guidance View. You fastest route. and warnings:
can turn this feature off by selecting “Automatic  Ask Me So I Can Choose
Map View Switching” in the settings.  Warning Type: You can choose the type of warn-
You can choose whether you would like the ings you want to hear when you are driving:
AUTOMATIC ZOOM Navigation system to allow you to pick the route
 Warning Sounds: Hear only warning sounds
to the destination.
Select this setting to control the full screen preview  None: No warning sounds are given
 Don’t Ask me
when you approach highway exits.
You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to select the route to the
destination.
MULTIMEDIA 125
 Safety Warnings: You can change settings for NOTE: Using Search
whether you want to be warned, never warned, This is not a software update and will not affect the 1. Select “Search” on the Main Menu to begin a
or warned only if you are speeding. The following version of the software application installed on search. The search screen will open,
options are available: your Uconnect system. displaying the keyboard. Enter the name of
 When speeding: This warning is given when Points Of Interest your desired destination. Your search results
you exceed the speed limit by more than will be displayed in two lists. Addresses and
3 mph (5 km/h). When you are speeding, ABOUT POINTS OF INTEREST city matches are shown in the list called
the speed panel also turns red in the Guid- Points Of Interest (POI) are useful places on the “Addresses.” POIs, types of POIs, and Places
ance View. map. are shown in the list called “Points of
 Driver Safety: Select this setting to make Interest.” You can also select a POI category
Here are some examples: to only see POI search results from that
some features locked while the vehicle is in
motion.  Restaurants category.
 Hotels 2. Select the desired POI. The location will appear 5
NOTE:
This feature increases safety by minimizing driver  Museums on the map. From here, you can save the POI
distraction. When driver safety is on, a message to “My Places,” use this POI as a starting point,
 Parking lots
tells you when the lock is enabled. begin navigation to this destination, or view
 Gas stations more details about this POI. By pressing “More
SYSTEM  Emergency Services Information,” you can view the phone number
and full address of the POI.
Select this setting to reset all other settings.
USING POIS TO PLAN A ROUTE 3. If a route is already planned, you can add the
Selecting “Reset” will delete all saved places and
settings and restore the standard settings. This When you plan a route, you can use a POI for the location to your current route. To plan a route
includes the language, voice settings, warning destination or as a stop along the route. to this destination, press the Drive button on
settings, and theme. the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Your Navigation system will calculate a route, and
guidance to your destination will begin. Guidance
View will begin as soon as you start driving.
126 MULTIMEDIA
My Places NOTE: Adding A Location From The Map

Your Navigation system immediately starts guiding 1. In Map View, move the map and zoom in until
ABOUT MY PLACES you to your destination with spoken instructions you can see the destination that you want to
and visual instructions on the touchscreen. navigate to.
My Places provides an easy way to select a
location without the need to enter the address or ADDING A LOCATION TO MY PLACES 2. Press and hold the point on the map to select
search for the location. You can use My Places to that location.
create a collection of useful or favorite addresses. Adding From My Places
3. Press the three vertical dots to the right of the
The following items are always in My Places: 1. In the Main menu, press “My Places”. name to open the pop-up menu.
 Home: Your home location can be your home
2. Press “Add”. 4. Press “Add To My Places”.
address or somewhere you often visit. This
feature provides an easy way to navigate there.
 Recent Destinations: Select this button to select
your destination from a list of locations you have
recently navigated to.
USING MY PLACES
You can use My Places as a way of navigating to a
place without having to enter the address. To
navigate to a saved destination in My Places,
follow these steps: Adding From My Places Adding A Location To My Places
1. Press the touchscreen to bring up the main
3. To select a location, do one of the following: 5. The name of the location will appear in the edit
menu, and press “My Places”.
 Zoom in on the map at the location you want screen. You can edit the name of the location
2. Select the desired destination. The location
to select. Press and hold to select the loca- for easy recognition.
will appear on the map with a pop-up menu.
tion, then press the Add Location symbol. 6. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
3. Press the Drive button to begin navigation to
 Search for a location using the search func- Places list.
this destination.
tion. Select “Show on Map,” then press the
Add Location symbol.
MULTIMEDIA 127
Adding A Location Using Search DELETING A LOCATION FROM MY PLACES Important Safety Notices And Warnings
1. In the Main Menu, press “Search”. Deleting A Recent Destination From My Places
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
2. Enter the name or address of a location using 1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
the touchscreen keyboard. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a
2. Press “Recent Destinations”. satellite-based system that provides location and
3. Select the desired location, and then press
3. Press “Edit List”. timing information around the globe. GPS is
“Show In Map”.
4. Select the destination(s) you want to delete. operated and controlled under the sole
4. The Map View will show the location. Press the responsibility of the Government of the United
pop-up menu button. 5. Press the Delete button. States of America, which is responsible for its
5. Press “Add to My Places”. availability and accuracy. Any changes in GPS
Deleting A Location From My Places
availability and accuracy, or in environmental
6. The name of the location will appear in the edit 1. In the main menu, select “My Places”. conditions, may impact the operation of this
screen. You can edit the name of the location
2. Press “Edit List”. Navigation system. TomTom® does not accept any
for easy recognition.
liability for the availability and accuracy of GPS.
5
7. Press “Done” to save your location in the My 3. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
Places list. 4. Press the Delete button. USE WITH CARE
Use of TomTom® navigation while driving still
Setting Your Home Location Getting Help means that you need to drive with due care and
1. In the Main Menu, press “My Places”. Press the Help button in the Main menu or from attention.
2. Press “Home” . the Settings menu to see the following information:
SAFETY SETTINGS
3. To select a location for home, do one of the About: Press this button to view information about
your Uconnect system. This information includes: We recommend using the safety settings to make
following:
your driving as safe as possible. These are some of
 Zoom in on the map at the location you want  Serial number
the options included in the safety settings:
to select. Press and hold to select the loca-  Application version
 Show safety reminders
tion, then press the home icon next to the  Installed maps
name of the location.  Warn when driving faster than allowed
 Legal information, such as Copyright and
 You can also search for a location using the You can also drive more safely by using voice
Licenses for EULA and Open Source
search function. Select “Set Home Loca- commands to control navigation Ú page 123.
tion.”
128 MULTIMEDIA
Copyright Notices Linotype, Frutiger and Univers are trademarks of The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with
Linotype GmbH registered in the US Patent and a push button in the center. Pushing the top of the
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. TomTom®
Trademark Office and may be registered in certain switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
and the "two hands" logo are registered
other jurisdictions. MHei is a trademark of The bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.
trademarks of TomTom® N.V. or one of its
Monotype Corporation and may be registered in The push button located in the center of the
subsidiaries. Please see www.tomtom.com/
certain jurisdictions. right-hand control to select the source (AM, FM,
en_us/legal/ for warranties and end user license
agreements applying to this product. SiriusXM®, or USB)
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. This
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
material is proprietary and the subject of copyright IF EQUIPPED push button in the center. The function of the left
protection and/or database rights protection and/ hand control is different depending on which mode
The remote sound system controls are located on you are in.
or other intellectual property rights owned by
the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach
TomTom® or its suppliers. The use of this material The following describes the left-hand control
behind the wheel to access the switches.
is subject to the terms of a license agreement. Any operation in each mode.
unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material
will lead to criminal and civil liabilities. RADIO OPERATION
Data Source © 2021 TomTom® All rights reserved. Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the
The software included in this product contains next available station and pushing the bottom of
copyrighted software that is licensed under the the switch will seek down for the next available
GPL. A copy of that license can be viewed in the station.
License section. You can obtain the complete The button located in the center of the left-hand
corresponding source code from us for a period of control will tune to the next preset station that you
three years after our last shipment of this product. have programmed in the radio preset button.
For more information, visit https://
www.tomtom.com/en_gb/opensource or Remote Sound System Controls
contact your local TomTom® customer support
team via us.support.tomtom.com/app/
answers/list. Upon request, we will send you a CD
with the corresponding source code.
MULTIMEDIA 129
MEDIA M ODE Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles  Create a password and enter billing information.
Before you get started you will need: An email will be sent to you to complete the final
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next step. After that, you will be ready to log-in and
track on the selected media (USB/Bluetooth®).  The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of each access Verizon Connect Fleet!
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the vehicle you want to activate.
 You are good to go! You will receive an email
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning  Your main user’s username and password; new confirming your vehicles are now online.
of the previous track if it is within eight seconds customers will be asked to register.
after the current track begins to play. For more information, or to learn more, visit
 If you are a new customer, you will need
www.verizonconnect.com/ram/.
company credit card information or invoice
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED number as further proof of customer identifica- RAM T ELEMATICS GENERAL
tion. Don’t worry, you will not be charged.
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve I NFORMATION
safety, efficiency, and productivity. It gives you  Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/
complete visibility of your fleet options, whether #login. If you are an existing Verizon Connect Modification Statement
from behind a desk or on a mobile device while you
5
customer, enter your company’s log in creden- Marelli has not approved any changes or
are on the go. You can log-in to view near real-time tials. New customers will need to register to modifications to this device by the user. Any
and historical activity, including location, vehicle create a new account. changes or modifications could void the user’s
health, and driver performance. authority to operate the equipment.
 Manually enter the VIN or upload a CSV file with
your VIN. A vehicle name is optional and can be Marelli n'approuve aucune modification apportée
added later. Follow online instructions to à l'appareil par l'utilisateur, quelle qu'en soit la
complete your vehicle entry. nature. Tout changement ou modification peuvent
annuler le droit d'utilisation de l'appareil par
l'utilisateur.
130 MULTIMEDIA
Interference Statement RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and 27
of the FCC and Industry Canada licence-exempt Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being standards and recommendations, which reflect
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy the consensus of the scientific community.
following two conditions:(1) This device may not performance from your radio. This condition may The radio manufacturer believes the internal
cause interference, and(2) This device must be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
accept any interference, including interference mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is level of energy emitted is far less than the
that may cause undesired operation of the device. not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio of wireless radios may be restricted in some
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone situations or environments, such as aboard
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée operation when not using the Uconnect system.
aux deux conditions suivantes:(1) l'appareil ne doit airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
pas produire de brouillage, et(2) l'utilisateur de REGULATORY AND SAFETY encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 245.
l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage I NFORMATION
radioélectrique subi, même si le broulliage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. US/CANADA
RF Exposure Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
environment. The antenna should be installed and exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
operated with minimum distance of 8 in (20) cm will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
between the radiator and your body. (20 cm) or further from the human body.
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition
aux rayonnements de la IC pour environnement
non contrôlé. L'antenne doit être installé de façon
à garder une distance minmale de 20 centimètres
entre la source de rayonnements et votre corps.
131
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! WARNING!
FOUR-W HEEL ANTI-L OCK BRAKE  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer- those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
SYSTEM (ABS) ence caused by improperly installed or high following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
The ABS is designed to aid the driver in output radio transmitting equipment. This planing.
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking interference can cause possible loss of
 The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
conditions. The system operates with a separate anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
must never be exploited in a reckless or
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to such equipment should be performed by qual-
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding ified professionals.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
on slippery surfaces.  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
When you are in a severe braking condition 6
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
motor makes a low humming noise during Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
operation, which is normal. need to slow down or stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light.  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of base brake system.
When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
functioning. The system reverts to standard increase braking or steering efficiency beyond pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking
non-Anti-Lock Brakes. Turning the ignition OFF and that afforded by the condition of the vehicle noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate
ON again may reset the ABS if the fault detected brakes and tires or the traction afforded. that the system is functioning properly.
was only momentary.
(Continued)
132 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) WARNING!

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced the natural laws of physics from acting on the path does not match the intended path, ESC
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevent collisions, including those resulting from condition.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Electronic Roll excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
Mitigation (ERM) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a WARNING!
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
and control in various driving conditions and are a reckless or dangerous manner, which could prevent the natural laws of physics from
commonly referred to as ESC. jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
others. traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
Brake Assist System (BAS)
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
capability during emergency braking maneuvers.
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
The system detects an emergency braking ESC enhances directional control and stability of
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
application and then applies optimum pressure to corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
the brakes. This can help reduce braking applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock counteract the above conditions. Engine power
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To the desired path.
reckless or dangerous manner which could
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
continuous braking pressure during the stopping than appropriate for the steering wheel position. others.
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less (Continued)
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
the BAS is deactivated.
SAFETY 133
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING! 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
maintain your vehicle, may change the and corrected.
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
may negatively affect the performance of the (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
ESC system. Changes to the steering system, soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
suspension, braking system, tire type and size becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor- Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the chance that wheel lift will occur.
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte- occurring during severe or evasive driving
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
prevailing road conditions.
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
injury and death. 6
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is WARNING!
in a reduced mode.
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
NOTE: conditions and driving conditions, influence the
And ESC OFF Indicator Light chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster momentarily each time the ignition switch especially those that involve leaving the roadway
will come on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. or striking objects or other vehicles. The
turned to the MAR (ON/RUN) position for capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi- never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
engine running, a malfunction has been detected turned off previously. or the safety of others.
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
134 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped

WARNING!
HSA is designed to assist the driver when starting TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain There may be situations on minor hills with a excessively swaying trailer and will take the
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
short period of time after the driver takes their foot the system will not activate and slight rolling may The system may reduce engine power and apply
off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply occur. This could cause a collision with another the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract
the throttle during this short period of time, the vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is the sway of the trailer.
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE:
will roll down the hill. The system will release brake TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle Traction Control System (TCS) use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
applied as the vehicle starts to move in the trailer tongue weight recommendations
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
intended direction of travel. Ú page 68.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
HSA ACTIVATION CRITERIA pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS power may be reduced and you may feel the
to activate: system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions brakes being applied to individual wheels to
 The vehicle must be stopped. similarly to a limited slip differential and controls attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
 The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
grade or greater hill. a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the Off” mode.
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
 Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to WARNING!
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off”
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
mode Ú page 132.
when the activation criteria have been met. The adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL or PARK.
SAFETY 135
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
(TPMS) low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) placard pressure value.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the the recommended cold placard pressure in order CAUTION!
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
 The TPMS has been optimized for the original
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
Light will turn off once the system receives the
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This and warning have been established for the tire
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
means that when the outside temperature size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire system operation or sensor damage may
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
pressure should always be set based on cold result when using replacement equipment
information.
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for NOTE: Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need damage. 6
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum above the recommended cold placard pressure in
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle For example, your vehicle may have a aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
is driven — this is normal and there should be no recommended cold (parked for more than three that you take your vehicle to an authorized
adjustment for this increased pressure. hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the dealership to have your sensor function
See Ú page 217 on how to properly inflate the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the checked.
vehicle’s tires. measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
warning limit for any reason, including low on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
temperature effects and natural pressure loss may cause the tire pressure to rise to sensor.
through the tire.
136 SAFETY
NOTE: NOTE: Check TPMS Warnings

 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire It is particularly important for you to check the tire The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
care and maintenance or to provide warning of pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly seconds and remain on solid when a system fault
a tire failure or condition. and to maintain the proper pressure. is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure The TPMS consists of the following components: a proper text message will be displayed. If the
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.  Receiver module ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat
providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS
 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire  Four TPMS sensors
Warning Light will turn off when the fault condition
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire  Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low of the following scenarios:
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Pressure Warnings 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu- chime will be activated, and the “Check tire 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation pressure” text message will display when one or tinting that affects radio wave signals.
has not reached the level to trigger illumination more of the four active road tire pressures are low. 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
of the TPMS Warning Light. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as housings.
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
tire pressure in the tire Ú page 245.
value. The system will automatically update and sensors.
Base System the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
This is the TPMS Warning Light located updated tire pressures have been received. The NOTE:
in the instrument cluster. vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes Your vehicle can be equipped with either a Tire
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this Service Kit, a compact spare tire or a regular size
The TPMS uses wireless technology with spare tire (with or without original TPMS sensor).
information.
wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit
tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
SAFETY 137
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if 6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is Here are some simple steps you can take to
equipped): After fixing the punctured tire with driven for short periods of time, then the minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
original tire sealant, the original situation will system can take a while to be restored. 1. Children 12 years old and under should
be restored, so system will turn off the always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
warning light during the normal drive. NOTE: vehicle with a rear seat.
2. Compact Spare Tire (if equipped): The For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring System
behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
compact spare wheel is not equipped with a vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
TPMS sensor. So when mounted, during the key-off during each tire substitution.
the appropriate child restraint or
normal drive the system will turn on the
warning light (flashes for approximately 75 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 166.
seconds then remains solid). This condition Some of the most important safety features in your
persists until a wheel equipped with original 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
vehicle are the restraint systems: rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
TPMS sensor has been mounted on the
vehicle. OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with  Seat Belt Systems restraint Ú page 166.
TPMS sensor): When mounted, during the 6
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
normal drive the system will turn on the telltale
(flashes for approximately 75 seconds then  Child Restraints behind them or under their arm.
remains solid). This condition persists until a Some of the safety features described in this 5. You should read the instructions provided with
wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has section may be standard equipment on some your child restraint to make sure that you are
been mounted on the vehicle. Then the system models, or may be optional equipment on others. If using it properly.
will be restored and the warning light will turn you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
off during the normal drive. shoulder belts properly.
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS 7. The driver and front passenger seats should
sensor): When mounted, the warning light will Please pay close attention to the information in be moved back as far as practical to allow the
turn off during the normal drive. this section. It tells you how to use your restraint front air bags room to inflate.
5. In all the above cases, please check the system properly, to keep you and your passengers
replacement tire inflation pressure before as safe as possible.
driving your vehicle.
138 SAFETY
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and BeltAlert Warning Sequence
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
into the space between occupants and the people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
door and occupants could be injured. the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
modified to accommodate a disabled person, motor vehicle should be belted at all times. passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
see Ú page 242 for customer service contact Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
information. (BeltAlert) BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
WARNING!
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the driver and outboard front seat Light will remain on until the seat belts are
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger passenger (if equipped with outboard buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
front air bag can cause death or serious injury front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
to a child 12 years or younger, including a their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
child in a rear-facing child restraint. whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START are buckled. The driver should instruct all
or MAR/RUN position. occupants to buckle their seat belts.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing Initial Indication Change Of Status
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a equipped with outboard front passenger seat
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
SEAT BELT S YSTEMS unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, AVV/START or MAR/RUN position the Seat Belt
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
a poor driver and could cause a collision that outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard
includes you. This can happen far away from home front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
or on your own street. outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
SAFETY 139
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

active when the outboard front passenger seat is WARNING! WARNING!
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
animal or other items are placed on the outboard more severe injuries in a collision. The air and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat bags work with your seat belt to restrain you including the driver, should always wear their
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even provided at their seating position to minimize
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat though you have air bags. the risk of severe injury or death in the event
belts, and cargo is properly stowed. of a crash.
 In a collision, you and your passengers can
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an suffer much greater injuries if you are not  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- your injuries in a collision much worse. You
recommend deactivating BeltAlert. rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you might suffer internal injuries, or you could
NOTE: can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or sure you and others in your vehicle are instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with buckled up properly. to keep your passengers safe, too.
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is 6
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  Two people should never be belted into a
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people single seat belt. People belted together can
on and remain on until the driver and outboard riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- crash into one another in a collision, hurting
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. ously injured or killed. one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
Lap/Shoulder Belts belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped matter what their size.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
with lap/shoulder belts. seat belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during (Continued)
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
140 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

WARNING! WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
 A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is and adjust the seat.
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
part of your seat belt as low as possible and the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
keep it snug. as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop- necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
will take the force in a collision.
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. your lap.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat protect you from injury during a collision. You
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
dealer immediately and have it fixed. you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
could ride too high on your body, possibly collision and leave you with no protection.
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
seat belt into the buckle nearest you. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too Pulling Out The Latch Plate
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
collision, or if you have questions regarding 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
Wear your seat belt snugly.
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
(Continued) vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho- “click.”
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
SAFETY 141
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
shoulder belt.
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically down to the position that serves you best.
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on lap/shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap the anchor point. 6
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
under the seat belt in a collision. the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt Adjustable Anchorage
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the position, and if you are taller than average, you will
slot at the top of the latch plate. prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is locked in position.
no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt

142 SAFETY
Position the lap belt snug and low below the

WARNING! abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. behind the back or under the arm.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the Seat Belt Pretensioner
shoulder belt.
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
 Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
 Always make all seat belt height adjustments
These devices may improve the performance of the
Adjustable Anchorage seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
when the vehicle is stationary.
NOTE: in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is occupants, including those in child restraints.
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
NOTE:
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
in the upward position without pushing or belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
squeezing the release button. To verify the must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
into position. pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
WARNING!
replaced immediately.
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
Energy Management Feature
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women with an Energy Management feature that may help
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
to keep your passengers safe, too. pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
an accident is reduced for the mother and the assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
(Continued)
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. controlled manner.
SAFETY 143
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors The figure below illustrates the locking feature for Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
(ALR) each seating position. restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
Vehicle Without Rear Seat and under should always be properly restrained in
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child WARNING!
restraint system Ú page 162.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
each seating position. front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations —  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
Vehicle With Rear Seat front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
If the passenger seating position is equipped with does not have a rear seat, do not transport a 6
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location — seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract belt.
Vehicle Without Rear Seat completely in this case and then carefully pull out 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
Vehicle With Rear Seat only the amount of webbing necessary to until the entire seat belt is extracted.
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
until you hear a "click."
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
restraint system Ú page 162. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is Locking Mode.
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
144 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a The ORC contains a backup power supply system
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) that may deploy the air bag system even if the
allow it to retract completely to disengage the monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System prior to deployment.
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
following Air Bag System Components: instrument panel for approximately four to eight
WARNING! Air Bag System Components seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
 Air Bag Warning Light the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
feature or any other seat belt function is not
 Steering Wheel and Column system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
working properly when checked according to
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
the procedures in the Service Manual.  Instrument Panel
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly  Knee Impact Bolsters initial startup.
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Seat Belt Buckle Switch illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
 Supplemental Side Air Bags
belt or children who are using booster seats. the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
The locked mode is only used to install  Supplemental Knee Air Bags nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints  Front and Side Impact Sensors is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
that have a harness for restraining the child. following occurs, have an authorized dealer
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
service the air bag system immediately.
Air Bag Warning Light  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
(SRS) monitors the readiness of the electronic tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
Some of the safety features described in this parts of the air bag system whenever the position.
section may be standard equipment on some ignition switch is in the AVV/START or  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch four to eight-second interval.
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
SAFETY 145
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine WARNING!
related gauges are not working, the Occupant  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
this condition the air bags may not be ready to front air bag can cause death or serious injury
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized to a child 12 years or younger, including a
dealer service the air bag system immediately. child in a rear-facing child restraint.
WARNING!  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have Driver Knee Air Bag Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
an authorized dealer service the air bag system 3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster Features 6
immediately. The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
WARNING! provides output appropriate to the severity and
Front Air Bags
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- type of collision as determined by the Occupant
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air information from the front impact sensors (if
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt equipped) or other system components.
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The ably extending your arms to reach the steering The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
passenger front air bag is mounted in the wheel or instrument panel. during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. (Continued) A low energy output is used in less severe
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
embossed on the air bag covers. severe collisions.
146 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or Front Air Bag Operation The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that passenger side of the instrument panel separate
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
Bags. bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
the driver and front passenger.
including some that may produce substantial
WARNING!
vehicle damage — for example, some pole Knee Impact Bolsters
 No objects should be placed over or near the collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
air bag on the instrument panel or steering collisions. of the driver and front passenger, and position the
wheel because any such objects could cause On the other hand, depending on the type and front occupants for improved interaction with the
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe location of impact, front air bags may deploy in front air bags.
enough to cause the air bag to inflate. crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag that produce a severe initial deceleration. WARNING!
covers or attempt to open them manually. You Because air bag sensors measure vehicle  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
may damage the air bags and you could be deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage impact bolsters in any way.
injured because the air bags may no longer be by themselves are not good indicators of whether
functional. The protective covers for the air  Do not mount any accessories to the knee
or not an air bag should have deployed.
bag cushions are designed to open only when impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all citizen band radios, etc.
the air bags are inflating.
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to position, away from an inflating air bag.
more severe injuries in a collision. The air Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t signals the inflator units. A large quantity of Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air panel below the steering column. The
though you have air bags. bags. Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
SAFETY 147
Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the space between the occupant and the door. The
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) high force that it could injure occupants if they are
are located in the outboard side of the front seats. not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
outboard side of the seats.
WARNING! Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Do not use accessory seat covers or place Label Location
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
performance could be adversely affected and/or
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
objects could be pushed into you, causing
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
serious injury.
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
6
body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
(SABICs)
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The properly, or if items are positioned in the area
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
or “AIRBAG.” greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
belts and body structure.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
148 SAFETY
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side

WARNING! impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle WARNING!
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
other cargo up high enough to block the or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. priate) are necessary for your protection in all
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions. They also help keep you in position,
above the side windows where the SABIC and collisions, including some collisions at certain away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
its deployment path are located should angles, or some side collisions that do not impact best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
remain free from any obstructions. the area of the passenger compartment. The Side pants must wear their seat belts properly and
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal sit upright with their backs against the seats.
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
collisions where the front air bags deploy. Children must be properly restrained in a child
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
the size of the child.
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
roof racks that require permanent attach- than it takes to blink your eyes.
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
WARNING!
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the WARNING!
vehicle for any reason.  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
 Occupants, including children, who are up
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
center of the seat.
Side Impacts seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in including children, should never lean on or  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint sleep against the door, side windows, or area deployment could cause you to be severely
Controller (ORC) determines whether the where the side air bags inflate, even if they are injured or killed.
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular in an infant or child restraint.
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity (Continued) to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
the ORC in determining the appropriate response you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
to impact events. The system is calibrated to won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the even though you have Side Air Bags.
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
SAFETY 149
NOTE: Air Bag System Components If you do have a collision which deploys the air
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior bags, any or all of the following may occur:
NOTE:
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.  The air bag material may sometimes cause
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
Rollover Events the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo- pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The nents listed below: abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines those you might get sliding along a carpet or
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
whether deployment in a particular rollover event gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of  Air Bag Warning Light contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good  Steering Wheel and Column nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
 Instrument Panel or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
 Knee Impact Bolsters immediately.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
sensing system determines if a rollover event may  Seat Belt Buckle Switch smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
be in progress and whether deployment is by-product of the process that generates the 6
 Supplemental Side Air Bags
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is  Supplemental Knee Air Bags airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy  Front and Side Impact Sensors nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
both sides of the vehicle. irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If A Deployment Occurs continues, see your doctor. If these particles
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
The front air bags are designed to deflate settle on your clothing, follow the garment
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
immediately after deployment. manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events. NOTE: Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli- deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
the air bag system.
150 SAFETY
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has NOTE:

WARNING! power After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as the STOP/OFF position and remove the key from
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an Response System engine compartment and on the ground near the
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the engine compartment and fuel tank before
 Unlock the power door locks
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced resetting the system and starting the engine. If
as well. Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
of these other functions in response to the electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
Enhanced Accident Response System: accident, reset the system by following the
NOTE:
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior contact an authorized dealer.
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.  Cut off battery power to the: Enhanced Accident Response System
 Engine Reset Procedure
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.  Electric Motor (if equipped) In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
Enhanced Accident Response System  Electric Power Steering must be changed from ignition AVV/START or
In the event of an impact, if the communication  Brake booster MAR/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF. Carefully check
network remains intact, and the power remains  Electric park brake the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the compartment and on the ground near the engine
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine  Automatic transmission gear selector
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response  Horn system and starting the engine. After an accident,
System perform the following functions:  Front wiper if the vehicle will not start after performing the
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an
 Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
(if equipped)
SAFETY 151
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an event data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
WARNING! recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
record, in certain crash or near crash-like recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
a road obstacle, data that will assist in age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
could be injured if the air bag system is not
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. other parties, such as law enforcement, could
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
The EDR is designed to record data related to combine the EDR data with the type of personally
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The investigation.
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data To read data recorded by an EDR, special
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add as: equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
aftermarket side steps or running boards. the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air ating;
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
can read the information if they have access to the 6
belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle or the EDR.
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
or may not function properly if modifications are  How fast the vehicle was traveling.
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
This data can help provide a better understanding
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
occur.
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
152 SAFETY
CHILD R ESTRAINTS WARNING!

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at In a collision, an unrestrained child can become Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
all times, including babies and children. Every a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
state in the United States, and every Canadian to hold even an infant on your lap could become
province, requires that small children ride in
NOTE:
so great that you could not hold the child, no
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you  For additional information, refer to http://
matter how strong you are. The child and others
can be prosecuted for ignoring it. could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for call: 1–888–327–4236
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to the child’s size.  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
crash statistics, children are safer when properly Canada’s website for additional information:
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
child-car-seat-safety.html
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
SAFETY 153
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat 6
154 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints All children whose weight or height is above the
WARNING! forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
Safety experts recommend that children ride
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
old or until they reach either the height or weight
front air bag can cause death or serious injury knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
to a child 12 years or younger, including a the child’s back is against the seatback, they
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
child in a rear-facing child restraint. should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
carriers and convertible child seats.
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
the vehicle by the seat belt.
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
until they reach the weight or height limit of the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle WARNING!
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.  Improper installation can lead to failure of an
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers a collision. The child could be badly injured or
Older Children And Child Restraints killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less Children who are two years old or who have turer’s directions exactly when installing an
than at least two years old. Children should remain outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat infant or child restraint.
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
 After a child restraint is installed in the
height allowed by their convertible child seat. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
or rearward because it can loosen the child
children who are over two years old or who have
restraint attachments. Remove the child
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
position. When the vehicle seat has been
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat. (Continued)
SAFETY 155
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
WARNING! back of the vehicle seat? then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
 When your child restraint is not in use, secure 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH the front of the vehicle seat while the child is belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do still sitting all the way back? the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
shoulder between the neck and arm? the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury. 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
touching the child’s thighs and not the correctly.
stomach?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats WARNING!
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
Children who are large enough to wear the trip? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
which may result in serious injury or death. A 6
child must always wear both the lap and
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
seat belt alone:
156 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints — Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
For instructions on installing child restraints in commercial vehicles without rear seating, see Ú page 165.
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower
LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether
Anchors Only Anchor
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
SAFETY 157
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Restraints In This Vehicle — Vehicles
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
Equipped With Rear Seating
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information. Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations —
Vehicle With Rear Seat 6
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
158 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of combined weight of the child and the child restraint
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the No
child seat in the center seating position.
outboard seating positions?
SAFETY 159
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
Can two child restraints be attached using a dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
Yes
the front passenger seat? also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 19.
6
160 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages — Center Seat LATCH
Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
WARNING!
The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages
that are found at the rear of the seat behind each rear seating position  Do not install a child restraint in the center
cushion where it meets the seatback, located on the back of the seat. position using the LATCH system. This position
below the anchorage symbols on the is not approved for installing child seats using
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the LATCH attachments. You must use the
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap seat in the center seating position.
between the seatback and seat cushion.  Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 161 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint

Tether Anchorage Locations manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be described here.
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
LATCH Anchorages to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
SAFETY 161
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
Restraint child restraint to the lower anchorages in the (ALR) Seat Belt:
selected seating position.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable When using the LATCH attaching system to install
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See it to the top tether anchorage. See being used by other occupants or being used to
Ú page 162 to check what type of seat belt each Ú page 164 for directions to attach a tether secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
seating position has. anchor. a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
on the tether strap of the child seat so that restraint rearward and downward into the restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
you can more easily attach the hooks or seat. Remove slack in the straps according to belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
2. Place the child seat between the lower behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
anchorages for that seating position. If the by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than through the child restraint belt path and then
second row seat can be reclined, you may buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not 6
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat toys and that they should not play with them.
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
162 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

WARNING! WARNING!
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
 Improper installation of a child restraint to the  Improper installation or failure to properly
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
restraint. The child could be badly injured or the restraint. The child could be badly injured
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- or killed.
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
infant or child restraint.
directions exactly when installing an infant or
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to child restraint.
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
circumstances are they to be used for adult are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
items or equipment to the vehicle. portion of the seat belt tight around the child Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations —
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking Vehicle With Rear Seating
Installing Child Restraints Using The clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Vehicle Seat Belt In Vehicles With Rear locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
Seating into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion into the retractor Ú page 143.
of a lap/shoulder belt.
SAFETY 163
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint? restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
Yes child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
the front passenger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact.
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
installation of the child restraint
Ú page 19.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
No
belt against the belt path of the child restraint? with an ALR retractor. 6
164 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor retractor to pass it through the belt path of the by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than
(ALR) — Vehicles Equipped With Rear the belt path. 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Seating:
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
hear a “click.”
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
of a lap/shoulder belt. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
tight against the child seat.
Tether Anchorage
WARNING! 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
 Improper installation or failure to properly WARNING!
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
allow the webbing to retract back into the Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear seat to any location in front of the car seat,
or killed.
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s now in the Automatic Locking mode. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
directions exactly when installing an infant or 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
child restraint. is locked, you should not be able to pull out any that seating position, located behind the top of
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat the vehicle seat. See Ú page 157 for the
step 5. location of approved tether anchorages in your
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
vehicle.
seating position. If the second row seat can 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or tighten the lap portion around the child
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a restraint while you push the child restraint
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
the seating position has a top tether
make room for the child seat. You may also
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
move the front seat forward to allow more
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
room for the child seat.
Ú page 164 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
SAFETY 165
1. Look behind the seating position where you Installing Child Restraints In Commercial
plan to install the child restraint to find the Vehicles — Vehicles Not Equipped With
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
Rear Seating
provide better access to the tether This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage a family vehicle and is not intended for carrying
for that seating position, move the child children in the front passenger seat(s). Never
restraint to another position in the vehicle if install rear-facing child restraints in this vehicle. If
one is available. you must carry a child in a forward-facing child
restraint, the passenger seat should be moved to
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
the full rearward position and the child must be in
direct path for the strap between the anchor Tether Strap Mounting
a proper restraint system based on its age, size
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
and weight. Follow the instructions below to secure
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the WARNING! the child restraint using the seat belt and tether
head restraint, and where possible, route the
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could anchorage.
tether strap under the head restraint and
lead to increased head motion and possible
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
WARNING! 6
the head restraint and pass the tether strap injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
around the outboard side of the head restraint. position directly behind the child seat to Rear-facing infant restraints must never be
secure a child restraint top tether strap. secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear passenger air bag. In a collision, a passenger air
in the diagram. seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip bag may deploy causing severe injury or death to
into the opening between the seatbacks as infants riding in rear-facing infant restraints.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. you remove slack in the strap.
166 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
WARNING!
Vehicle Seat Belt In Vehicles Without Rear Child Restraints (Commercial Vehicle)
 Improper installation or failure to properly
Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured the restraint. The child could be badly injured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion or killed.
of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING! directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
 Improper installation or failure to properly
the restraint. The child could be badly injured 1. Place the child seat in the center of the
or killed. seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
Bucket Seats retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor the belt path.
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
hear a “click.”
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep Installing A Child Restraint With A 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor tight against the child seat.
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a (ALR) — Vehicles Not Equipped With Rear 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” Seating: part of the belt until you have pulled all the
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
of the retractor and then letting the webbing Child restraint systems are designed to be secured allow the webbing to retract back into the
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is of a lap/shoulder belt. a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
pulled back into the retractor Ú page 143. now in the Automatic Locking mode.
SAFETY 167
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any Tether Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step 5. This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap
anchorage located behind the front passenger
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to seatback, near the floor. When installing a
tighten the lap portion around the child forward-facing child restraint, always secure the
restraint while you push the child restraint top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the tether anchorage. You may need to move
the seating position has a top tether the seat forward to provide better access to
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the Tether Strap Installation
the tether anchorage.
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 167 for directions to attach a tether 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most WARNING!
anchor. direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly to increased head motion and possible injury to
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
with adjustable head restraints, raise the head 6
restraint, and where possible, route the tether the child. Use only the anchorage position
the belt path. It should not move more than strap under the head restraint and between directly behind the child seat to secure a child
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint top tether strap.
restraint and pass the tether strap around the
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
outboard side of the head restraint.
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
168 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if

equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS secured by seat belts. removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE dealer service the vehicle immediately
AREA. I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Ú page 137.
WARNING! Seat Belts Defroster

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts place the blower control on high speed. You should
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup be able to feel the air directed against the
may cause serious injury or death. must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo your defroster is inoperable.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- Floor Mat Safety Information
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
sion, people riding in these areas are more
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Program facility for inspection. operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
Air Bag Warning Light
seat belts. attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for slip out of position and interfere with the
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat four to eight seconds as a bulb check
and using a seat belt properly. accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
when the ignition switch is first placed in operation of your vehicle in other ways.
the on ON/RUN position. If the light is
TRANSPORTING P ETS either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
SAFETY 169
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to each pedal to check for interference with the
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: check for interference. If your floor mat inter- accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not re-install the floor mats.
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO  It is recommended to only use mild soap and
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
NOT install your floor mat upside down water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
trunk.
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull always check your floor mat has been properly
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on installed and is secured to your vehicle using
fasteners on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area. the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
6
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE into the driver’s side floor area when the PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
before installing any other floor mat. vehicle is moving. Objects can become
NEVER install or stack an additional trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle Tires
control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
be properly attached and secured to your (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, change the position of the floor mat and may Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the cause interference with the accelerator, sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
specific make, model, and year of your brake, or clutch pedals. lug nut/bold torque for tightness. Check the tires
vehicle. (Continued) (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
(Continued)
170 SAFETY
Lights
WARNING!
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift- WARNING!
controls. Check turn signal and high beam gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
Door Latches use the recirculation mode. carbon monoxide poisoning:
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Fluid Leaks the engine running, adjust your heating or carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
cooling controls to force outside air into the gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should The best protection against carbon monoxide entry an open area with the engine running for more
be located and corrected immediately. into the vehicle body is a properly maintained than a short period, adjust the ventilation
engine exhaust system.
EXHAUST GAS system to force fresh, outside air into the
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the vehicle.
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
WARNING!  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an maintenance. Have the exhaust system
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
odorless. Breathing it can make you system and adjacent body areas for broken, Have any abnormal conditions repaired
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Open seams or loose connections could permit windows fully open.
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
confined areas any longer than needed to
system each time the vehicle is raised for
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
(Continued)
171
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will WARNING!
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on continue to operate even though the ignition is  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
the instrument panel below the radio screen. placed in the OFF position. changing tires only. The jack should not be
NOTE: used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
may wear down your battery. surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

WARNING! 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Avoid icy or slippery areas.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when WARNING!
Hazard Warning Flashers Button operating the jack or changing the wheel. 7
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
Flashers. When the button is activated, all The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on enough off the road to avoid being hit when
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn you. You could be crushed. Never put any part operating the jack or changing the wheel.
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to
Flashers. a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
This is an emergency warning system and it should  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it is on a jack.
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a (Continued)
safety hazard for other motorists.
172 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. J ACK L OCATION — I F EQUIPPED

3. Apply the parking brake.
The jack bag is placed on the front passenger floor
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P). or in the rear cargo area depending on the trim
5. Turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) level.
position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right driver’s wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Jack Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
Jack/Tools Location
5 — Wheel Chock
REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE — 6 — Jack
IF E QUIPPED
2. To access the winch mechanism, open the
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
Wheel Blocked rear doors of the vehicle to expose the winch
jack up the vehicle. The spare tire is located
mechanism access hole. Install the wrench
NOTE: at the rear of the vehicle, under the cargo
handle and winch extension into the winch
floor. Attach the wrench handle to the winch
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when mechanism hole.
extension.
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 173
Winch Access Hole Location Installing Wrench Handle Lowering The Spare Tire
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter- 4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground gain access to the spare tire retainer.
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other 7
power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
Jack Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension Spare Tire
5. Remove the wing nut prior to removing the 7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
retainer from the wheel. wheel. WARNING!
 Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Wing Nut Retainer
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
cable.  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
WARNING! careful of motor traffic.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help  To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the valve stem facing the ground.
the edge of the roadway as possible before  The stowed spare tire should always be
raising the vehicle. checked for security by pushing on it with your
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
hand, at the location under the rear fascia/
bumper, behind the vehicle. The spare tire
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set an auto- should not move when fully secured by the
matic transmission in PARK; a manual trans- winch under the vehicle.
mission in REVERSE.
Lifting Spare Tire
(Continued)
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug

bolts with the wrench handle by turning them
to the left one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jack Warning Label Front Jacking Location
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
Front Lifting Point
Rear Lifting Point
Jacking Locations
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to

the right until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
Rear Jacking Location only enough to remove the tire. Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING! 5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. wheel covers, remove the cover from the
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of Then pull the wheel off the hub.
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you 6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a lug bolts using the bolt install wrench.
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
until the jack head is properly engaged in the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the Installing Spare Tire
described location. Do not raise the vehicle vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. warning may result in serious injury. CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to VEHICLES W ITH A LLOY WHEELS 2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards
the left Ú page 236. and perfectly coincide with the flange cut part;
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with alloy fit the bracket in the adapter, fold the bracket
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
wheels, remove the adapter bracket and bolts up and secure it to the adapter with the
from the storage bag in the glove compartment fastening knob.
WARNING!
and follow the steps below:
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision 1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of between the spring and the flange of the
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the bracket (The adapter bracket is sold
spare tire in the places provided. Have the separately through the dealer).
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
9. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before

driving the vehicle Ú page 177.
10. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s seat.
Adapter/Bracket
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as 1 — Adapter 7
required. 2 — Fastening Knob
12. When you place the spare tire back on the
winch or if you carry the tire in need of repair Adapter/Spacer 3. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted
on the winch, always check that the tire is adapter on the inner part of the rim, using the
properly secured under the vehicle by pushing 1 — Adapter
supplied bolts fasten the wheel to the adapter
on the stowed tire under the rear fascia/ 2 — Plastic Spacer using the bolt install wrench.
bumper at the back of the vehicle. If the tire
has motion when pushed, use the tools to
re-tighten the winch until a loud click is heard.
VEHICLES E QUIPPED WITH WHEEL 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover
COVERS by hand, snapping the cover over the two
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the cover.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two wheel 4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
bolts on the wheel. Install the wheel bolts with threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel. wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
Alloy Wheel Mounting To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle. jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until
warning may result in serious injury.
the wheel is properly stowed under the vehicle
and until the wench makes three audible
noises. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to
confirm that it is secure. The tire should not 6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
move. If the tire is still loose and/or three on the wrench while holding at the end of the
audible noises are not heard, place and secure Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
damaged wheel into the vehicle and seek wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel
dealer assistance for the winch mechanism. 1 — Valve Stem bolt has been tightened twice Ú page 236.
2 — Valve Notch 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt
3 — Road Tire torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
4 — Wheel Cover wheel bolts are properly seated against the
5 — Wheel Lug Nut wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED TIRE SERVICE KIT U SAGE WARNING!

Small punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tire If a tire is punctured, you can make a first  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be under the passenger seat. the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be using the Tire Service Kit.
in outside temperatures down to approximately repaired; the kit can be used in all weather
-4°F (-20°C).  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
conditions. Do not remove the foreign object from
under the following circumstances:
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it  If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). out from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.  If the tire has any sidewall damage.
TIRE SERVICE KIT S TORAGE
 If the tire has any damage from driving
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger
seat. with extremely low tire pressure.
 If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
 If the wheel has any damage. 7
 If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
Tire Service Kit Components
(Continued)
1 — Power Button
Tire Service Kit Storage 2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Sealant Bottle
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
Push the Tire Service Kit power button on. The If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
WARNING! electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and repeat the inflation process to reach the correct
 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a colli- air will inflate the tire. tire pressure and continue driving.
sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place
the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that
place provided. Failure to follow these warnings been reached, turn off and remove the Tire Service a tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and
you, your passengers, and others around you. forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the WARNING!
 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire tire.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat the
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the inflation process.
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
NOTE:
When the correct pressure has been reached, Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change date at an authorized dealer.
sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any check the tire pressure. If the pressure is below
contact with clothing. 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as the
 Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, authorized dealer.
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal- WARNING!
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this Tire Service Kit Sealant Canister
socket. Start the vehicle engine. warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
WARNING! CAUTION! The positive battery post is covered with a
Store the sealant canister in its special Do not use a portable battery booster pack or protective cap. Press on tabs, then lift up on the
compartment, away from sources of heat. any other booster source with a system voltage cap to gain access to the positive (+) battery post.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
sealant canister rupture and serious injury or starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
death. occur.
JUMP STARTING PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable assembly.
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully. Positive Battery Post Protective Cap
NOTE: See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic 7
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
precautions. ignition to STOP.
WARNING! 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
Positive (+) Battery Post Location battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
personal injury.
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Failure to follow these procedures could result in
could establish a ground connection and damage to the charging system of the booster
personal injury could result. vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables

WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged
whenever the hood is raised. It can start vehicle.
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be Jump Starting Label
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
injured by moving fan blades.
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the WARNING!
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, booster battery.
watch bands and bracelets that could make 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper Do not connect the jumper cable to the
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be cable to the negative (-) post of the booster negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
seriously injured. battery. resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in personal
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) injury.
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
flames or sparks away from the battery. part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground booster battery, let the engine idle a few
must be away from the battery and the fuel minutes, and then start the engine in the
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE injection system. vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
WARNING! necting procedure below.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS WARNING!

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
with the discharged battery. serviced by an authorized dealer. coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce If you see or hear steam coming from under the
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
the potential for overheating by taking the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
appropriate action. has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
booster battery.
system pressure cap when the radiator or
 On the highways — slow down.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper coolant bottle is hot.
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster  In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
battery. mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) engine idle speed while preventing vehicle CAUTION!
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the motion with the brakes.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
vehicle with the discharged battery, and NOTE: your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
reinstall the protective cap. There are steps that you can take to slow down an HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
impending overheat condition: vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
If frequent jump starting is required to start your  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
vehicle you should have the battery and charging A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
system inspected at an authorized dealer. system and turning the A/C off can help remove 7
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
this heat. immediately and call for service.
CAUTION!
 You can also turn the temperature control to
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, the blower control to high. This allows the heater
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will system.
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE 7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering
column cover.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK (P) before the ignition switch can be turned
CAUTION!
to the STOP (key removal) position. It is advisable to contact an authorized dealer to
To remove the key manually, proceed as follows: have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you
would like to proceed in performing the reinstall
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
procedure special attention must be paid to the
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo correct coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage
area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left to the cover or noise might be heard due to
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
side in the cargo box. incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/ 6. Pull the release tab downwards using one
telescoping control handle down. hand and with the other one remove the key,
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the
sliding it outwards. GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
end of the travel position, then lock the If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
steering column in position, push the control cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you
handle up until fully engaged. can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
5. Using the Allen Key, undo the lower steering
column cover screws, and remove the lower 1. Turn the engine OFF.
cover. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully
separate the gear selector boot from the
center console.
Release Tab Location

6. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL (N).
the gear selector override access hole, then 8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
push and hold the override release lever down.
While holding the override release lever down,
push the lock button on the gear selector and FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
position. snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
Gear Selector Boot Location shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal. pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
5. Locate the gear selector override hole (at the motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
right front corner of the gear selector engine.
assembly). NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
Using The Gear Selector Override only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph 7
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Gear Selector Override Access Hole Location

NOTE:
CAUTION! Push the ESC OFF button, to place the Electronic
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode,  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
lead to transmission overheating and failure. before rocking the vehicle Ú page 132. Once the between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five again to restore ESC On mode. drivetrain damage may result.
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
WARNING!  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
vehicle. generated by excessive wheel speeds may the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
7
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to

prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars CAUTION! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
and other equipment designed for this purpose,  Do not use sling type equipment when towing. (EARS)
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Vehicle damage may occur.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, Accident Response System.
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated do not attach to front or rear suspension This feature is a communication network that
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles components. Damage to your vehicle may takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 150.
under tow must be observed. result from improper towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
must be in the ON/RUN mode. all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's NOTE: record data that will assist in understanding how a
battery is discharged, for instructions on shifting If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
the transmission out of PARK (P) for towing must be towed with the front wheels OFF the or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
Ú page 184. ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 151.
equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
189
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
change indicator system. The oil change indicator by someone other than an authorized dealer, to  Check windshield washer fluid level.
system will remind you that it is time to take your reset the message Ú page 41.  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
NOTE:
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
Under no circumstances should oil change
change indicator message will illuminate. This cator system turns on.
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350
means that service is required for your vehicle. hours of engine run time or 12 months, whichever  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
trailer tow, extended engine idle time, extremely time is generally only a concern for fleet  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence customers.
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the maintenance schedule for the required maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas
and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses, lines and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 191
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and
X
replace if necessary.
8
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. 1 X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.2 X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.3 X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if operated in dusty and off-road environment.
2. The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
3. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION! WARNING!

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will Commercially available windshield washer
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel damage your engine. burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is working around the washer solution.
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off. ADDING W ASHER FLUID
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground The windshield and rear window washers share the
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
There are four possible dipstick types: in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to battery. You will never have to add water, and
check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular periodic maintenance is not required.
 Crosshatched zone.
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the WARNING!
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the water.
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
range. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
NOTE: blade performance. on skin, flush the area immediately with large
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer amounts of water Ú page 181.
markings on the dipstick. system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at that meets or exceeds the temperature range of flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil your climate. This rating information can be found use a booster battery or any other booster
level to the high end of the range marking. on most washer fluid containers. source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
(Continued)
WARNING!
PRESSURE WASHING WARNING!
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- Cleaning the engine compartment with a high You can be badly injured working on or around a
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash pressure washer is not recommended. motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
hands after handling. you have the knowledge and the proper
CAUTION! equipment. If you have any doubt about your
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
CAUTION! parts and connections however, the pressures to a competent mechanic.
 It is essential when replacing the cables on
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
the battery that the positive cable is attached
cannot be guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts Engine Oil Selection
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 240.
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts An authorized dealer has the qualified service
and free of corrosion. personnel, special tools, and equipment to American Petroleum Institute (API)
perform all service operations in an expert Approved Engine Oil
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
manner. Service Manuals are available which These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
include detailed service information for your by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
cables before connecting the charger to the
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before trademark oils.
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
attempting any procedure yourself.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 8
NOTE: 0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in The API Donut trademark certifies
civil penalties being assessed against you. 0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION! ENGINE OIL FILTER Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement filters varies
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such filter at every engine oil change.
filters should be used.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Engine Oil Filter Selection
Limited Warranty. A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters For best possible performance, your air conditioner
Synthetic Engine Oils varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® should be checked and serviced by an authorized
certified filters should be used. dealer at the start of each warm season. This
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
service should include cleaning of the condenser
only use synthetic API approved engine oils. ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 190. should also be checked at this time.
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used. NOTE:
WARNING!
Be sure to follow the Severe Duty Conditions main-
Materials Added To Engine Oil tenance interval if applicable Ú page 189.  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
The manufacturer strongly recommends against cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
the addition of any additives (other than leak WARNING! tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
engineered product and its performance may be etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants
impaired by supplemental additives. case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air can cause the system to fail, requiring costly
repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or for further warranty information.
Filters
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the  The air conditioning system contains refrig-
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine engine compartment before starting the vehicle erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, personal injury or damage to the system,
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
problem to the environment. Contact an serious personal injury. to be disconnected should be done by an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
experienced technician.
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
CAUTION! BODY LUBRICATION WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES

Do not use chemical flushes in your air Locks and all body pivot points, including such Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
conditioning system as the chemicals can items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
damage your air conditioning components. Such rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with accumulations of salt or road film.
Limited Warranty. a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — application of any lubricant, the parts concerned wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
R-1234yf should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu- from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper contact with petroleum products such as engine
Environmental Protection Agency and is an oil, gasoline, etc.
ozone-friendly substance with a low function. When performing other underhood
global-warming potential. The manufacturer services, the hood latch, release mechanism and NOTE:
recommends that air conditioning service be safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery The external lock cylinders should be lubricated on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
and recycling equipment. twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
NOTE:
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
into the lock cylinder.
8
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Wiper Service Position EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION!

If it is necessary to lift the blade from the The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
windshield (In the event of snow or blade  The catalytic converter requires the use of
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
replacement) proceed as directed: engine exhaust system. destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust emissions control device and may seriously
the OFF position. system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected reduce engine performance and cause
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR (ON/RUN) position inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of serious damage to the engine.
then to STOP. the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within technician inspect the complete exhaust system
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
two minutes move the right stalk upward, into and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
the unstable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
particularly involving engine misfire or other
half of a second. The windshield wiper then or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
apparent loss of performance, have your
executes part of a stroke; at each command, to seep into the passenger compartment. In
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke is addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
triggered. time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
could cause the converter to overheat,
change. Replace as required.
NOTE: resulting in possible damage to the converter
The previous operation can be repeated up to and vehicle.
WARNING!
three times in order to move the blades to the most
suitable position.  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
with the required operation. odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
scious and can eventually poison you
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
Ú page 170.
contact with the windshield. possible catalyst damage.
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position,
over materials that can burn. Such materials
turning the ignition to MAR (ON/RUN).
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate
NOTE:
your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system
Do not operate the wiper with the blades lifted
can contact anything that can burn.
from the windshield.
NOTE: COOLING SYSTEM Engine Coolant Checks

Intentional tampering with emissions control Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
systems can result in civil penalties being WARNING! every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
assessed against you. weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
In unusual situations involving grossly  You or others can be badly burned by hot
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off under the hood, do not open the hood until the
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
be obtained immediately. ator or coolant bottle is hot.
garden hose vertically down the face of the
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away condenser.
damage: from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
raised. The fan starts automatically and may rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
start at any time, whether the engine is connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
running or not. radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
towing the vehicle.
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni- WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo- tion to the OFF position. The fan is tempera-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when ture controlled and can start at any time the
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods ignition is in the ON position. 8
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine Please review these recommendations for using
coolant products. Do not use additional rust OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant When adding engine coolant:
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
and may plug the radiator.  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.  This vehicle has not been designed for use with Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
If the engine coolant is dirty or contains visible propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032). recommended.  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
 Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant that meets the requirements of the
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 190.
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
Selection Of Coolant properly could lead to severe internal engine and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
For further information Ú page 240. damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
the system please contact an authorized dealer. −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
NOTE:
an authorized dealer for assistance.
 Mixing of engine coolant other than specified Adding Coolant
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or
OAT engine coolant, may result in engine Your vehicle is built with engine coolant (OAT
damage and may decrease corrosion protec- deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and should coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
extended maintenance intervals. This engine
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech- quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
coolant can be used up to 10 years or
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally sion protection in the engine cooling system.
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine To prevent reducing this extended maintenance NOTE:
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in period, it is important that you use the same  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
an emergency, the cooling system will need to engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to proper level of protection against freezing
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. according to the temperatures occurring in the
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho- area where the vehicle is operated.
rized dealer as soon as possible.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add Coolant Level

coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems WARNING!
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
properly could lead to severe internal engine  Do not open a hot engine cooling system. visual method for determining that the coolant
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold,
the system, please contact a local authorized the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or the level of the engine coolant in the bottle should
dealer. remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, The radiator normally remains completely full, so
mended and can result in cooling system there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure. pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise an
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one authorized dealer of this. As long as the engine
MS.90032) as soon as possible. specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
Cooling System Pressure Cap engine damage may result. only needs to be checked once a month.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of When additional engine coolant is needed to
engine coolant, and to ensure that engine coolant Disposal Of Used Coolant maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery Used ethylene glycol-based coolant is a regulated meets the requirements of the manufacturer
tank. substance requiring proper disposal. Check with Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there your local authorities to determine the disposal the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
is any accumulation of foreign material on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion, do
sealing surfaces. not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open 8
The image on the coolant system containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
pressure cap is a reminder that the ground, clean up immediately. If ingested, seek
radiator contains hot engine coolant emergency assistance immediately.
under pressure.
Cooling System Notes  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle Brake Master Cylinder
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
NOTE: The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your when performing under hood services or
meters of operation, you may observe vapor vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep immediately if the Brake Warning Light is
coming from the front of the engine compartment. the front of the condenser clean. illuminated.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces- before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. bring the fluid level up to the requirements
opens, allowing hot engine coolant to enter the Other designs may result in unsatisfactory described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
radiator. engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage, brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
If an examination of your engine compartment and increased emissions. brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the checked when pads are replaced. However, low
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
BRAKE SYSTEM fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
dissipate. In order to ensure brake system performance, all may be needed. Use only the manufacturer
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. brake system components should be inspected recommended brake fluid Ú page 241.
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator WARNING!
Ú page 190.
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the  Use only the manufacturer recommended
WARNING! brake fluid Ú page 241. Using the wrong type
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting system and/or impair its performance. The
 If frequent engine coolant additions are
or riding on the brake pedal can result in proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
required, the cooling system should be pressure also identified on the original factory installed
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
tested for leaks. hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a would not have your full braking capacity in an (Continued)
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to emergency.
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
WARNING!
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or Selection Of Lubricant
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that It is important to use the proper transmission fluid Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep to ensure optimum transmission performance and and its performance may be impaired by
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at life. Use only the manufacturer specified supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any
all times. Brake fluid in an open container transmission fluid Ú page 241. It is important to fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil using the recommended fluid. seals.
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged NOTE:
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This CAUTION!
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
could result in a collision.
mission; only the approved lubricant should be Do not use chemical flushes in your
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result used. transmission as the chemicals can damage your
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, transmission components. Such damage is not
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake CAUTION! covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl Using a transmission fluid other than the
surfaces; care should be taken to avoid its manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
contact with these surfaces. deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
 Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam- torque converter shudder Ú page 241.
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
8
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes 15 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
require adjustment under normal operating installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
required; therefore the transmission has no Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
transmission fluid level using special service tools. becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission transmission is disassembled for any reason.
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level UPFITTER CONNECTORS — IF EQUIPPED
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
The preparation connectors are to be only used by
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
upfitters. This connector is located under the dash. Connector Pin Numbers
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
Connector Location
PIN Function
1 Not Connected
2 Generator Voltage Sensor 2
3 Vehicle Speed Signal
4 Not Connected
5 Not Connected
6 Not Connected
7 Courtesy Lamp Feed
8 Ambient Lighting Control
9 Not Connected
10 Not Connected
11 Not Connected
12 Not Connected
13 Ignition Run/Start Output
14 Not Connected
15 Not Connected 8
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the 2 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
vehicle is ordered with the applicable package.
Upfitter Connector
Connector Pins
PIN Function
A Power Supply
B GND
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the For additional questions about these connectors
vehicle is ordered with the applicable package. as well as general technical questions about
upfitting your Ram product, refer to https://
CAUTION! www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
The maximum current load allowed is 15 amps body-builders-guide.html/ or call
for continuous use. 1 (866)-205-4102.
Upfitter Connector
FUSES CAUTION!
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right
General Information If it is necessary to wash the engine side of the engine compartment, next to the
compartment, take care not to directly hit the fuse battery. To access the fuses, remove fasteners and
WARNING! box, and the windshield wiper motors with water. remove the cover.
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same The fuses protect electrical systems against CAUTION!
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace excessive current.  When installing the power distribution center
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
When a device does not work, you must check the cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for to do so may allow water to get into the power
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
extended periods of time with the engine off may distribution center and possibly result in an
use proper fuses may result in serious
result in vehicle battery discharge. electrical system failure.
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems 8
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems, (engine system, transmission
system) steering system or Body Control
Module (BCM) blows, contact an authorized
Blade Fuses
dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
Power Distribution Center Location

The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps,
F02 40 Amp Orange –
Front Heated Seats *
Rear Power Windows, Front Heated
F02 30 Amp Green –
Seats Fog Lamps *
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats *
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed

* If Equipped
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam
F15 – – –
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster *
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
8
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
BSM System, Positive Key and
F24 – 5 Amp Tan
Steering Angle Sensor
2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet
F30 – 15 Amp Blue
(Battery)
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module

* If Equipped
Rear Power Outlet 12 Volts
F85 – 15 Amp Blue
(ACC/ON/RUN)
IP Power Outlet 12 Volts
F86 – 15 Amp Blue
(ACC/ON/RUN)
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost *
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side
under the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Please contact an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
Interior Power Distribution Center Location Fuse Panel Cavity Locations

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC, FTM
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 15 Amp Blue KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio, USB, SGW
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F13 7.5 Amp Brown Supply for left low beam bulb or discharge lamp
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils
KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.), IPC, Brake
F37 5 Amp Beige
Pedal Switch (N.C.)
KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, TTM, SGW,
F49 5 Amp Beige
Heaters Light, ECM Backlighting
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
8
Central Unit Fuse Panel

The central power fuse panel is located on the
driver’s side under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
Central Power Distribution Location
Cavity Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger *
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver *
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side *
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side *
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps *
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11 8
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized adealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced visit an authorized dealer or refer to
the applicable Service Manual.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS PARKING AND DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
See below steps to replace: See below steps to replace:
HEADLAMPS
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer 1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer
See below steps to replace: upper headlamp housing. lower headlamp housing.
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the 2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove. 2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
headlamp housing.
3. Install the bulb into socket. 3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise. socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Rotate the bulb/socket clockwise into the
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. lamp locking it in place. 4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in 5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS THIRD BRAKE LIGHT (CENTER MOUNT) Replacing Interior Bulbs
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not See below steps to replace:
serviced separately. See an authorized dealer for
DOME LAMP WITH SPOT LIGHTS
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two
replacement of these lights. fastening screws and extract the cluster. See below steps to replace:
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber 1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the tabs,
REAR TAIL, STOP, BACKUP AND TURN SIGNAL
plugs, remove retaining tabs and extract the using a suitable tool.
LAMPS
cluster.
The rear light cluster contains taillight, brake light,
direction indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. 3. For versions with high roof and swing doors,
To access the light clusters, see below steps to remove the pressure-fit plastic guard and
replace: rubber cap using a screwdriver, release the
retaining tags as shown in the figure and
1. Open the rear doors. remove the unit.
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp 4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the
assembly. bulb holder.
3. Remove the screws and separate the 5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
backplate from the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS Dome Lamp Assembly
pushing them slightly and turning counter- See below steps to replace: 2. Open protective cover.
clockwise.
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the 8
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling lens by lifting to the left.
straight out.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. side contacts; insert the new bulbs and make
sure they are correctly clamped between these
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as
contacts.
follows:
REAR ROOF LAMP 2. Open the cover.

See below steps to replace:
1. Remove roof lamp by pressing the tabs, using
a suitable tool.
Dome Lamp
1 — Protective Cover Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
2 — Bulbs
1 — Cover
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the Roof Lamp

side contacts making sure that the new bulbs 3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the side
are correctly secured between the contacts. contacts making sure that the new bulbs are
correctly secured between the contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
back into its housing, making sure that it locks
into place.
Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side) Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — Bulb  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
back into its housing, making sure that it locks (TIN) the sidewall preceding the size designation.
into place.
2 — Size Designation Example: LT235/85R16.
TIRES 3 — Service Description  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
4 — Maximum Load
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or 8
5 — Maximum Pressure “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the 6 — Treadwear, Traction and designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Temperature Grades  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
B-pillar
front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in
units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
Maximum Inflation Pressure inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into
the sidewall.
The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire
inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 8

NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not Limit—
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your (1) Locate the statement “The combined
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
weight of occupants and cargo should
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard vehicle's placard.
Ú page 67. (2) Determine the combined weight of
NOTE: the driver and passengers that will be
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross riding in your vehicle.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the
Tire And Loading Information Placard
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
This placard tells you important information about and trailer towing Ú page 67. XXX lbs.
the:
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
1. Number of people that can be carried in the your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
vehicle. weight of occupants and cargo should never
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
and spare tires. weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, NOTE:
available amount of cargo and luggage load from your trailer will be transferred  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” to your vehicle. Consult this manual to your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will determine how this reduces the The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
be five 150 lb passengers in your available cargo and luggage load capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
vehicle, the amount of available cargo capacity of your vehicle. configurations and number and size of occu-
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. Metric Example For Load Limit pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
(5) Determine the combined weight of there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
luggage and cargo being loaded on the the amount of available cargo and luggage load  For the following example, the combined weight
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as of occupants and cargo should never exceed
vehicle. That weight may not safely
shown in step 4. 865 lb (392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION WARNING!

Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
Tire Pressure  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the problems. You could lose control of your resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
pressure:
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Safety drift to the right or left. uncomfortable ride.
 Fuel Economy  Always drive with each tire inflated to the Tire Inflation Pressures
 Tread Wear recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the side door.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
At least once a month:
WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
can cause collisions.
NOTE:
make a visual judgment when determining
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause erratic and unpredictable steering
result in overheating and tire failure. even when they are under inflated.
response.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible 8
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may damage.
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
can cause damage that result in tire failure. CAUTION!
Fuel Economy
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
resulting in loss of vehicle control. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
(Continued) valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where WARNING!
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased handle poorly. The instability could cause a
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to four. Never combine them with other types of
sidewall.
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment tires.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire Repair
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING! If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. it meets the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added strain  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could  The damage is only on the tread section of your
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). (6 mm).
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
condition. and additional information.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
be too low. size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Life Of Tire

WARNING!
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces factors including, but not limited to:
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could  Driving style.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is explode and injure someone. Do not spin your  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving for more than 30 seconds continuously when develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. the need for earlier tire replacement.
tire is changed after driving with under inflated tire  Distance driven.
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
not designed to be reused when driven under Run or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
tires to help you in determining when your tires
NOTE: should be replaced. the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the recommended.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the WARNING!
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the When the tread is worn to the tread wear Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
Run Flat mode. indicators, the tire should be replaced. six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
8
For more information Ú page 135. For further information Ú page 228.
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
Tire Spinning have a collision resulting in serious injury or
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, death.
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 185.
NOTE: questions you may have on tire specifications or

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement CAUTION!
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and Replacing original tires with tires of a different
tires. ride of your vehicle. size may result in false speedometer and
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as odometer readings.
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires WARNING!
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or TIRE TYPES
Replacement Tires speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved All Season Tires — If Equipped
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of tires and wheels may change suspension
many characteristics. They should be inspected All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
dimensions and performance characteristics, (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
pressures. The manufacturer strongly levels may vary between different all season tires.
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre- All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the dictable handling and stress to steering and
originals in size, quality and performance when M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
suspension components. You could lose season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
replacement is needed Ú page 227. Refer to the control and have a collision resulting in
Tire and Loading Information placard or the may adversely affect the safety and handling of
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and your vehicle.
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires —
your tire will be found on the original equipment If Equipped
tire sidewall.  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
For more information relating to the Load Index conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 218. equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over- snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or loading and failure. You could lose control and Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can have a collision. designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
specifications match those of the original wheels. adequate speed capability can result in are covered with ice or snow. For more
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. information, contact an authorized dealer.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
Summer tires do not contain the all season Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the what was originally equipped with your vehicle and designated for temporary emergency use
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; should not be operated at sustained speeds over Ú page 72.
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
handling of your vehicle. (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe And Wheel — If Equipped
WARNING! operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
pressures. wheel equivalent in look and function to the
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, original equipment tire and wheel found on the
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
vehicle control.
laws should be checked before using these tire tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
types. pattern.
Snow Tires Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
Some areas of the country require the use of snow SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified NOTE: use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
sidewall. of a spare tire Ú page 179. spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
If you need snow tires, select tires Information Placard located on the driver’s side
equivalent in size and type to the CAUTION! door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. 8
original equipment tires. Use snow tires Because of the reduced ground clearance, do Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
only in sets of four; failure to do so may not take your vehicle through an automatic car letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
adversely affect the safety and handling of your wash with a compact or limited use temporary Example: T145/80D18 103M.
vehicle. spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
result. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Since this tire has limited tread life, the original Full Size Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
since the wheel is designed specifically for the and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one opportunity.
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
given time. properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the When the tread is worn to the tread wear
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
WARNING! lowering the vehicle. needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Compact and collapsible spares are for Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
temporary emergency use only. With these conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph since the wheel is designed specifically for the at the first opportunity.
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited collapsible spare tire. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire WARNING! The limited use spare tire is for temporary
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to Compact and Collapsible spares are for located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss temporary emergency use only. With these contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
of vehicle control. spares, do not drive more than 50 mph tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the do so could result in spare tire failure and loss at the first opportunity.
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading of vehicle control.
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration

WARNING! caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium CAUTION!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to products may damage the wheel's protective
more than the speed listed on the limited use wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and protective coating that helps keep them from Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
Loading Information Placard located on the corroding and tarnishing. recommended.
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original CAUTION!
NOTE:
equipment tire at the first opportunity and Avoid products or automatic car washes that use If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or extended period after cleaning the wheels with
result in loss of vehicle control. harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
cleaners and automatic car washes may brakes to remove the water droplets from the
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE damage the wheel's protective finish. Such brake components. This activity will remove the
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® vibration when braking.
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including 8
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
not hot to the touch.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low

Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
CAUTION! those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow The following tire grading categories
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a were established by the National
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
smooth, quiet ride. Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
damage this finish and such damage is not For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 190. The specific grade rating assigned by the
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should tire's manufacturer in each category is
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND be corrected prior to rotation being performed. shown on the sidewall of the tires on
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular The suggested rotation method is the “forward your vehicle.
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this cross” shown in the following diagram. This
finish. rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
tires that must not be reversed. to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION D EVICES
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction
TREADWEAR
devices are not recommended. The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
CAUTION!
when tested under controlled conditions
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains on a specified government test course.
are used. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS the government course as a tire graded
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) 100. The relative performance of tires
operate at different loads and perform different depends upon the actual conditions of
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these their use, however, and may depart
reasons, they wear at unequal rates. significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service Sustained high temperature can cause  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
practices, and differences in road the material of the tire to degenerate  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
characteristics and climate. and reduce tire life, and excessive service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
temperature can lead to sudden tire run the air conditioning system at idle for about
TRACTION G RADES five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
The Traction grades, from highest to level of performance, which all cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades passenger vehicle tires must meet damage when the system is started again.
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
pavement, as measured under Standard No. 109. Grades B and A BODYWORK
controlled conditions on specified represent higher levels of performance
government test surfaces of asphalt and on the laboratory test wheel, than the PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor minimum required by law. AGENTS
traction performance. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
WARNING!
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is make roads passable in snow and ice and those
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based established for a tire that is properly inflated and that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
does not include acceleration, cornering, or excessive loading, either separately or in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. combination, can cause heat buildup and vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on 8
possible tire failure. which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
TEMPERATURE G RADES adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
The Temperature grades are A (the
STORING THE VEHICLE protection.
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3 The following maintenance recommendations will
resistance to the generation of heat and weeks, we recommend that you take the following enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested battery:
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
What Causes Corrosion? PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK Special Care

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
Washing
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your at least once a month.
The most common causes are:
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation  It is important that the drain holes in the lower
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
 Stone and gravel impact completely with water.
kept clear and open.
 Insects, tree sap and tar  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities paint, touch them up immediately.
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
Cleaning Headlights as possible.
scratch the paint.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
to stone breakage than glass headlights. materials are well packaged and sealed.
the paint finish.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and  If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must CAUTION! consider mud or stone shields behind each
be followed. wheel.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses rials such as steel wool or scouring powder  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap touch up paint to match the color of your
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi vehicle.
solution followed by rinsing.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, of paint and decals.
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
INTERIORS Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
Lenses
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS The lenses in front of the instruments in this
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
and carpeting. the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
the plastic. applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution needed.
(both passenger and cargo area). may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean CAUTION!
WARNING! with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning LEATHER SURFACES Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
if used in closed areas they may cause Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended result.
respiratory harm. for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
GLASS SURFACES
PLASTIC AND C OATED PARTS particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. the leather upholstery and should be removed basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
CAUTION! removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when 8
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean instruments that may scratch the elements.
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe your leather upholstery.
away immediately. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
 Damage caused by these type of products spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
236
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
normal capability, the remaining system will still vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
function. However, there will be some loss of reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice be torqued using a properly calibrated torque
increased pedal travel during application, greater wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall socket.
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake System Warning Light. TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
repeated brake applications with the engine off), Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
63 Ft-Lb
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
(86 N·m) Steel
than that required with the power system
Vehicle Identification Number Wheels Only
operating.
89 Ft-Lb M12 x 1.25 17 mm
NOTE: (120 N·m)
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. Aluminum
Wheels Only
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug

nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 237
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
loose particles. While operating on gasoline with the
recommended octane, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Torque Patterns Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt experience these symptoms, try another brand of
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Wheel Mounting Surface properly seated against the wheel.
2.4L E NGINE
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until WARNING!
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure This engine is designed to meet all
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the emissions regulations and provide
(do not insert it halfway). jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until excellent fuel economy and
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow performance when using high quality
this warning may result in personal injury. unleaded regular gasoline having a octane rating
of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will
not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in 9
these engines.
238 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Problems that result from using gasoline CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
Many areas of the country require the use of gasoline containing methanol are not the MODIFICATIONS
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or Modifications that allow the engine to run on
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline not be covered under New Vehicle Limited compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended Warranty. (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
quality. E-85 U SAGE I N NON-F LEX FUEL that result from running CNG or LP are not the
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. V EHICLES responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
provide improved performance and durability of Warranty.
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the MMT I N GASOLINE
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
oxygenates such as ethanol. that is blended into some gasoline to increase
symptoms:
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
CAUTION!  Operate in a lean mode. performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on. same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
 Poor engine performance.
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting reduces emissions system performance in some
 Poor cold start and cold drivability. vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed  Increased risk for fuel system component gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
the applicable standard, and/or cause the corrosion. MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask a
observe pump labels as they should clearly gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
communicate if a fuel contains greater than MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
15% ethanol (E-15). reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION!

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, CAUTION!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
corrosion, and stability additives are Follow these guidelines to maintain your mended. Most of these products contain high
recommended. Using gasolines that have these vehicle’s performance: concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce damage or vehicle performance problems
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
Designated TOP TIER Detergent engine performance and damage the emis- tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
Gasoline contains a higher level of sions control system. turer and may void or not be covered under
detergents to further aide in minimizing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
engine and fuel system deposits. When  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent NOTE:
is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a Intentional tampering with the emissions control
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may system can result in civil penalties being assessed
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents require immediate service. Contact an autho- against you.
should be avoided. Many of these materials rized dealer for service assistance.
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can (Continued)
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
9
240 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 195.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Automatic Transmission
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4.
Brake Master Cylinder The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
Power Steering Reservoir

Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting the manufacturer 9
Material Standard MS-11655.
242
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (866) 726-4636
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
resolved with this process.
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS  If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk P.O. Box 1621
If you list a number of items and you must have to the general manager or owner of the autho- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the rized dealer. They want to know if you need
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
situation with the service advisor and list the items assistance.
French
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you  If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges concern, you may contact FCA US LLC’s
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to customer center.
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 243
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs relay contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay please refer to the contract documents, and
Mexico, D.F.
Service operator. contact the person listed in those documents.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
You may have purchased a service contract for a authorized dealer has also made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of investment in facilities, tools, and training to
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
P.O. Box 191857 Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® ownership experience.
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
San Juan 00919-1857 extended protection plans authorized, endorsed WARNING!
Phone: (866) 726-4636 and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
Fax: (787) 782-3345 protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
only), some of its constituents, and certain
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
known to the State of California to cause cancer
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
(TDD/TTY) questions about the service contract, call FCA US
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu- at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
reproductive harm.
its customer center. Any hearing or speech French).
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a 10
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
244 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
this vehicle and market. Refer to WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.mopar.com/om for further information. www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
See the Warranty Information for the terms and defect that could cause a crash or cause
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
injury or death, you should immediately D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further inform the National Highway Traffic information about motor vehicle safety
information. Safety Administration (NHTSA) in from http://www.safercar.gov.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
further information. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
Use this QR code to access your may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
digital experience. that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
MOPAR® PARTS dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories Investigations and Recalls at
and factory filled fluids are available from an 1-800-333-0510 or go to
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain PCDB-BDPP.
its original condition.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 245
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om (US) or
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
To order the following manuals, you may use either www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
the website or the phone numbers listed below. licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
Or
Service Manuals conditions suivantes:
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
 1-800-890-4038 (US) et
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
straightforward language with illustrations, Information Books can be ordered through brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts. Archway at: brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on UConnect
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
The following regulatory statement applies to cause interferencia perjudicial y
They show exactly how to find and correct
UConnect devices equipped in this vehicle:
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and FCC ID: Y7OVP2REFRESH cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
a complete list of all tools and equipment. IC: 7812H-VP2REFRESH pueda causar su operación no deseada.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules NOTE:
Procedure manuals, visit: and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). Development Canada license-exempt RSS
by the party responsible for compliance could void
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
Owner's Manuals the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
two conditions:
Remarque: Les changements ou modifications
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with 1. This device may not cause harmful 10
the assistance of service and engineering non expressément approuvés par la partie
interference, and
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA responsable de la conformité peuvent annuler
vehicles. 2. This device must accept any interference l'autorisation de l'utilisateur à utiliser l'équi-
received, including interference that may pement.
cause undesired operation.
246
INDEX
A Air Pressure B
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............200 Tires ......................................................... 225 Battery ................................................... 45, 194
Additives, Fuel ...............................................239 Alterations/Modifications Charging System Light .................................45
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................107 Vehicle........................................................... 7 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................10
Air Bag Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 200, 240 Belts, Seat .................................................... 168
Air Bag Operation ......................................146 Disposal ................................................... 201 Bluetooth
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................146 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 131 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 150, 188 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................47 Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 104
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................188 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 134 Body Builders Guide........................................... 7
Front Air Bag .............................................145 Audio Settings ..................................................96 Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 197
If Deployment Occurs ................................149 Audio Systems (Radio) .....................................78 B-Pillar Location ............................................ 221
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................146 Auto Down Power Windows .............................34 Brake Assist System ..................................... 132
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............151 Automatic Transmission ........................... 55, 56 Brake Fluid .................................................... 241
Maintenance .............................................151 Adding Fluid ..................................... 204, 241 Brake System ....................................... 202, 236
Transporting Pets ......................................168 Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 204 Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 131
Air Bag Light ...........................................44, 168 Fluid Change ............................................ 204 Fluid Check ...................................... 202, 241
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ..196 Fluid Level Check ............................ 203, 204 Master Cylinder ........................................ 202
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................196 Fluid Type ........................................ 203, 241 Parking ........................................................54
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 196, 197 Special Additives ...................................... 203 Warning Light...............................................45
Air Conditioner System ..................................196 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........32 Brake, Parking .................................................54
Air Conditioning Filter ...................................... 31 Axle Fluid ...................................................... 241 Brake/Transmission Interlock ..........................56
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips................ 30, 31 Bulb Replacement ........................................ 213
Air Filter .........................................................196 Bulbs, Light .......................................... 170, 213
247
C Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 160 D

Camera, Rear .................................................. 65 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 157 Defroster, Windshield ................................... 168
Capacities, Fluid ............................................240 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 154 Deleting A Phone........................................... 104
Caps, Filler Seating Positions ...................................... 156 Diagnostic System, Onboard ............................50
Fuel ............................................................. 66 Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 238 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................193 Cleaning Oil (Engine) ............................................... 194
Power Steering ............................................ 60 Wheels ..................................................... 231 Power Steering ............................................60
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................201 Climate Control ................................................28 Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 187
Car Washes ...................................................234 Cold Weather Operation ..................................52 Disconnecting ............................................... 104
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................170 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 229 Displayed
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 37 Contract, Service .......................................... 243 Values ..........................................................44
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 37 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 201 Disposal
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................. 37 Cooling System ............................................. 199 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 201
Certification Label ........................................... 67 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 200 Door Ajar ..........................................................45
Chains, Tire....................................................232 Coolant Level ............................................ 201 Door Ajar Light .................................................45
Changing A Flat Tire .......................................171 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 240 Door Locks .......................................................13
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................218 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 201 Doors ...............................................................13
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 200 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................16
Indicator Light) ................................................ 51 Inspection........................................ 199, 201 Driving
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................168 Points To Remember ................................ 202 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Checks, Safety ...............................................168 Pressure Cap ............................................ 201 Standing Water .......................................76
Child Restraint ...............................................152 Radiator Cap ............................................ 201
Child Restraints Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 200, 240 E
Booster Seats............................................155 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 233 Electric Brake Control System ....................... 132
Child Seat Installation ..................... 164, 166 Cruise Light ......................................................50 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................23
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....161 Customer Assistance .................................... 242 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........32
Infant And Child Restraints .......................154 Customer Programmable Features ..................79 Electronic Range Select (ERS) .........................59
Cybersecurity ...................................................78 11
248
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................132 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...150, 188 Fuel ............................................................... 237
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 46 Ethanol ......................................................... 238 Additives ................................................... 239
Emergency, In Case Of Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 170 Clean Air ................................................... 238
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck......................185 Exhaust System ................................... 170, 198 Ethanol ..................................................... 238
Jacking ......................................................171 Exterior Lights .........................................24, 170 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................................66
Jump Starting ............................................181 Gasoline ................................................... 237
Towing .......................................................187 F Materials Added ....................................... 239
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 51 Filters Methanol .................................................. 238
Engine ...........................................................193 Air Cleaner ................................................ 196 Octane Rating .................................. 237, 240
Air Cleaner.................................................196 Air Conditioning ...........................................31 Specifications ........................................... 240
Block Heater ............................................... 53 Engine Oil ........................................ 196, 240 Tank Capacity ........................................... 240
Break-In Recommendations ........................ 54 Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 196 Fuses ............................................................ 207
Checking Oil Level .....................................194 Flashers
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................240 Hazard Warning ........................................ 171 G
Cooling ......................................................199 Turn Signals .......................................49, 170 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..................................66
Exhaust Gas Caution .................................170 Flooded Engine Starting...................................53 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 237
Fails To Start ............................................... 53 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 240 Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 238
Flooded, Starting ......................................... 53 Fluid Leaks ................................................... 170 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 238
Jump Starting ............................................181 Fluid Level Checks Gear Ranges ....................................................57
Oil .................................................... 195, 240 Brake ........................................................ 202 Gear Selector Override .................................. 184
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................193 Engine Oil ................................................. 194 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 235
Oil Filter .....................................................196 Power Steering ............................................60 Gross Axle Weight Rating ..........................67, 68
Oil Selection .................................... 195, 240 Fluid, Brake .................................................. 241 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .....................67, 68
Oil Synthetic ..............................................196 Fog Lights ........................................................25 Guide
Overheating ...............................................183 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................16 Body Builders................................................. 7
Starting ....................................................... 52 Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 171 GVWR ...............................................................67
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 185
249
H Instrument Cluster .................................... 39, 40 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..11
Hazard Descriptions ................................................49 Keys .................................................................10
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Display.........................................................40 Replacement ...............................................11
Standing Water ....................................... 76 Display Controls...........................................40 Sentry (Immobilizer) .....................................12
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................171 Engine Oil Reset ..........................................41
Head Restraints ............................................... 19 Menu Items .................................................42 L
Headlights Instrument Panel .............................................39 Lane Change Assist..........................................25
Cleaning ....................................................234 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 235 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 139
Passing........................................................ 24 Interior And Instrument Lights .........................25 Latches ......................................................... 170
Switch ......................................................... 24 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 235 Hood ............................................................36
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 23 Interior Lights...................................................25 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 170
Heated Seats ................................................... 18 iPod Control .....................................................32 Life Of Tires ................................................... 227
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 53 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................................32 Light Bulbs ........................................... 170, 213
Hill Start Assist ..............................................134 Bluetooth Streaming Audio..........................32 Lights ............................................................ 170
Hitches Air Bag ............................................... 44, 168
Trailer Towing .............................................. 70 J Brake Assist Warning................................ 133
Hood Prop ........................................................ 36 Jack Location ................................................ 171 Brake Warning .............................................45
Hood Release .................................................. 36 Jack Operation .............................................. 171 Bulb Replacement .................................... 213
Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 171 Cruise ..........................................................50
I Jump Starting ............................................... 181 Daytime Running .........................................24
Ignition ............................................................ 12 Engine Temperature Warning ......................46
Key ....................................................... 10, 12 K Exterior .............................................. 24, 170
Switch ......................................................... 12 Key Fob Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 171
Ignition Key Removal ....................................... 12 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............11 Headlights ...................................................24
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 12 Key Fob Battery Service Interior .........................................................25
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 22 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................10 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........48
11
250
Park...................................................... 24, 49 Mirrors .............................................................22 Disposal .................................................... 196

Passing........................................................ 24 Electric Powered ..........................................23 Filter ................................................ 196, 240
Seat Belt Reminder ..................................... 46 Electric Remote ...........................................23 Filter Disposal ........................................... 196
Service ......................................................213 Exterior Folding............................................23 Identification Logo .................................... 195
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............135 Heated.........................................................23 Materials Added To................................... 196
Traction Control .........................................133 Outside ........................................................22 Pressure Warning Light................................46
Turn Signals .......................................49, 170 Rearview......................................................22 Recommendation ............................ 195, 240
Warning Instrument Cluster Modifications/Alterations Synthetic ................................................... 196
Descriptions ..................................... 46, 49 Vehicle........................................................... 7 Viscosity .................................................... 240
Loading Vehicle ........................................ 67, 68 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 135 Onboard Diagnostic System .............................50
Capacities ................................................... 68 Mopar Parts .................................................. 244 Operating Precautions .....................................50
Tires ..........................................................221 Operator Manual
Locks N Owner's Manual ........................................ 245
Power Door.................................................. 13 New Vehicle Break-In Period ............................54 Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................22
Low Tire Pressure System .............................135 Overheating, Engine ...................................... 183
Lubrication, Body ...........................................197 O
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................236 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 137 P
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 237, 240 Paint Care ..................................................... 233
M Oil Change Indicator ........................................41 Parking Brake ..................................................54
Maintenance Free Battery .............................194 Reset ...........................................................41 ParkSense System, Rear ..................................62
Maintenance Schedule..................................189 Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 196 Passing Light ....................................................24
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 48, 51 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 196 Personal Settings .............................................79
Manual Oil Pressure Light .............................................46 Pets ............................................................... 168
Service ......................................................245 Oil Reset ..........................................................41 Phone Mode .................................................. 100
Master Cylinder Oil, Engine ............................................ 195, 240 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 221
Brakes .......................................................202 Capacity.................................................... 240 Power
Methanol .......................................................238 Checking................................................... 194 Mirrors .........................................................23
Dipstick .................................................... 194 Steering .......................................................60
Windows ......................................................34
251
Power Steering Fluid ......................................241 S Seats ................................................................16

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................142 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 168 Adjustment ..................................................16
Preparation For Jacking .................................171 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 169 Heated .........................................................18
Pretensioners Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 244 Rear Folding ................................................16
Seat Belts..................................................142 Safety Information, Tire ................................ 217 Tilting ...........................................................16
Safety Tips .................................................... 168 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 240
R Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 170 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................12
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................226 Satellite Radio .................................................92 Service Assistance ........................................ 242
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............201 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 189 Service Contract ............................................ 243
Radio Operation ............................................130 Seat Belts ............................................ 138, 168 Service Manuals ........................................... 245
Rear Camera ................................................... 65 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 141 Settings, Audio .................................................96
Rear ParkSense System .................................. 62 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 141 Shift Lever Override ...................................... 184
Recreational Towing ........................................ 75 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .. 141 Shifting
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................238 Child Restraints ........................................ 152 Automatic Transmission ..............................56
Refrigerant ....................................................197 Energy Management Feature ................... 142 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 139
Release, Hood ................................................. 36 Front Seat............................... 138, 139, 140 Signals, Turn .......................................... 49, 170
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................138 Inspection................................................. 168 Sirius Satellite Radio ........................................92
Remote Keyless Entry Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 140 Favorites ......................................................95
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 11 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 141 Replay ..........................................................93
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........128 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 139 SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Replacement Bulbs .......................................213 Operating Instructions .............................. 140 Browse in SXM.............................................95
Replacement Keys........................................... 11 Pregnant Women ...................................... 142 Favorites ......................................................95
Replacement Tires.........................................228 Pretensioners ........................................... 142 Replay ..........................................................93
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................244 Rear Seat ................................................. 139 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 232
Restraints, Child ............................................152 Reminder............................................46, 138 Snow Tires .................................................... 229
Restraints, Head .............................................. 19 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 142 Spare Tires ........................................... 229, 230
Rotation, Tires ...............................................232 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 141 Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).......................................... 240 11
Oil ............................................................. 240
252
Speed Control Tires ...................................169, 225, 229, 232 Towing ..............................................................68

Cancel ......................................................... 62 Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 227 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 187
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........................ 60 Air Pressure .............................................. 225 Guide ...........................................................71
Starting ............................................................ 52 Chains ...................................................... 232 Recreational ................................................75
Automatic Transmission .............................. 52 Changing .................................................. 171 Weight .........................................................71
Cold Weather .............................................. 52 Compact Spare......................................... 229 Towing Behind A Motorhome ...........................75
Engine Fails To Start ................................... 53 General Information ........................ 225, 229 Traction ............................................................76
Steering ........................................................... 16 High Speed ............................................... 226 Traction Control ............................................ 134
Power .......................................................... 60 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 225 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 134
Tilt Column .................................................. 16 Jacking ..................................................... 171 Trailer Towing ...................................................68
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 16 Life Of Tires .............................................. 227 Hitches ........................................................70
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................128 Load Capacity .................................. 221, 222 Minimum Requirements ..............................71
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..47, 135 Tips ..............................................................74
System Controls ............................................128 Quality Grading ......................................... 232 Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........................71
Storage ............................................................ 31 Radial ....................................................... 226 Wiring ..........................................................73
Storage, Vehicle......................................30, 233 Replacement ............................................ 228 Trailer Towing Guide ........................................71
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................233 Rotation.................................................... 232 Trailer Weight ...................................................71
Sun Visor Extension ......................................... 22 Safety .............................................. 217, 225 Transmission....................................................56
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................134 Sizes ......................................................... 218 Automatic ................................... 55, 56, 203
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 8 Snow Tires ................................................ 229 Fluid.......................................................... 241
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................................196 Spare Tires ...................................... 229, 230 Maintenance ............................................ 203
Spinning ................................................... 227 Transporting Pets .......................................... 168
T Trailer Towing ..............................................72 Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 227
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 16 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 227 Trip Computer ..................................................43
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................................... 37 Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 236 Turn Signals .....................................................49
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 16 To Open Hood ..................................................36
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........221 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................71
Tire Markings .................................................217
Tire Safety Information ..................................217
Tire Service Kit ..............................................179
253
U Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A W

Uconnect Mobile Phone ....................................... 102 Warning Lights
Phone Call Features ..................................105 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device .... 103 Blue .............................................................50
Things You Should Know About Your Phonebook Download .............................. 104 Green ...........................................................49
Uconnect Phone....................................107 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 106 Red ..............................................................44
Uconnect Phone ......................... 101, 102, 103 Power-Up .................................................. 109 Yellow ..........................................................47
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Recent Calls ............................................. 106 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Call Currently In Progress ......................106 Redial ....................................................... 107 Descriptions) ....................................................49
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — To Remove A Favorite ............................... 105 Warning Lights And Messages .........................44
No Call Currently In Progress ................106 Toggling Between Calls............................. 107 Warranty Information .................................... 244
Bluetooth Communication Link .................109 Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 106 Washers, Windshield ............................. 26, 194
Call Continuation .......................................107 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .... 107 Washing Vehicle ............................................ 234
Call Controls ..............................................105 Voice Command ....................................... 107 Water
Call Termination ........................................107 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 232 Driving Through ...........................................76
Cancel Command ......................................102 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 141 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 231
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 231
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................104 V Wind Buffeting .................................................35
Help Command .........................................101 Vehicle Certification Label ...............................67 Window Fogging ...............................................30
Join Calls ...................................................107 Vehicle Loading ...............................67, 68, 222 Window Lockout Switch ...................................35
Making A Phone Or Audio Device Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 195 Windows ..........................................................34
A Favorite ..............................................104 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 7 Power...........................................................34
Making A Second Call While Current Call Vehicle Storage .......................................30, 233 Windshield Defroster .................................... 168
Is In Progress ........................................106 Voice Command...............................................21 Windshield Washers ........................................26
Managing Your Favorites...........................105 Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................21 Fluid.......................................................... 194
Operation ..................................................101 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 197
Overview....................................................100 Windshield Wipers ................................. 26, 194
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 197
Wrecker Towing............................................. 187 11
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to
take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY

©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. First Edition
OW N E R ’S M AN UA L
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_VM_OM_EN_USC

2022 Ram Promaster City: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Ram Promaster City: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Ram Promaster City: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM PROMASTER CITY

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 39 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................52 4

6 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 131 6

INTRODUCTION UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................21 CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 28

TRIP COMPUTER.................................................... 43 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...............................55 VEHICLE LOADING ................................................. 67

MULTIMEDIA SAFETY Jacking Instructions ...................................... 174

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................195 BODYWORK ......................................................... 233 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

FOOTNOTE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Red Warning Lights Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Green Indicator Lights

Low Fuel Warning Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Generic Warning Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light White Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11

NOTE: 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and NOTE:

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

DOUBLE R EAR S WING D OORS Opening/Closing The First Swing Door

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

HEAD R ESTRAINTS Front Adjustment Rear Adjustment — If Equipped

Outboard Head Restraint

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Removal Rear Removal — If Equipped

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS VANITY MIRROR Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Manual Outside Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE:

Manual Mirror Control Lever

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

EXTERIOR LIGHTS NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

INTERIOR LIGHTS Map/Dome Lights

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Lights Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

FRONT WIPER O PERATION Windshield Washers

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WIPER AND WASHER — CLIMATE CONTROLS A/C Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

Recirculation Button Front Defrost Setting